Home

MGS-3712(F)-C User's Guide V3.90 (Mar 2009)

Contents

1. 335 37 3 Cluster Management Status OVeriEW scccstccatcidsaccinseedase ronmecsianieagucedsnuattantdoiennceeacaieeeadie 335 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Table of Contents 37 4 Cluster Management SIDE osxtieottpdrpeona a bn gea e aoupi Kanu Ra e OG a itg aqaa a 336 37 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management seessssssseseeeenee inneren 397 37 9 Clustering Management GCohfigatretgl sccccnciessecssheteanisciecdaceebsinsaciebbadenteaedeaucventietaes 340 Chapter 38 ld 343 WTA TOM CIE aooaa kcu hon dica basi Fama x c dcr ag el 343 omes vndis MAL THSBIG Lucio ddp etin PER Seg MU Nt PR ep a aie 344 Chapter 39 ARP Table T 347 29 1 ARP Tabla OVEN sonaas innan rr oL bota on ua te E T Re 347 se E POR P WOT 3 eU yack win bep bn an DA pan dg gui DRE tI pn Fere MM ples bee iue PUE 347 99 2 VEG TG ARP TAS A a 348 Chapter 40 Configure qe 349 an Conde C IBS E E T ond Foe rcs bo vdd ec Rave aba rl C D aue N 349 Part VI Troubleshooting amp Product Specifications 351 Chapter 41 Troubleshooting Y O insta 353 41 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDS 1 pin apt nt P RO RO eR iii 353 21 2 Suh ACeS aV LOCI nain aakboht t etas i pria cec enun ba ecu cl a
2. 11 Part I Introduction and Hardware eeeeeeeeeeee 21 Chapter 1 Gelting to Know Your SWE 23 pug KEE DUN RTT T 23 LELENE AD CODON rania 23 Te BUCII IN e E 24 1 1 3 High Performance Switching EXample ss issrisisisisoisinnsnsnisirainenn annida 25 1 1 4 IEEE 802 10 VLAN Application Examples 22er trece metae etae cete envia 25 d Ways io Manage hie SIE se e D Pete e aon e E aa 26 1 3 Good Habits Tor Managing the SWIECIE 1 ea to tp ii Peer AERE ERU dA 26 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eene nennen nnn nnne nnn 29 SAEC nnt A 29 2 2 Desktop installation Procedure 2122iieua i ie eacu beni aga ioni Gerda aaur Rue adul EX cu NEAS 29 2 9 Mountina The Switi on a BON auuecousudecesantetcct kun ei i ERI EUREN PUR Ln r OE REM E PO RM DE 30 2 3 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements eese 30 2 3 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch essssseseeess 31 23a Mouming Me Switth on ur qe nni cae emp a i 32 Chapter 3 i i Rel OW 33 SALA AME TEE A E EN T Ela dre date sire ferta dou Ed DP Sas belg ortos Ze uas ep CE AE 33 EMEN FOr suric a a Muameeenacas 35 AUS GJH EDEME PONE inini ud onc bp AN 35 NECEM IET a 36 EMEN I II
3. NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION ESP User Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation IPSEC_TUNNEL Security Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 File Transfer Program a program to enable fast transfer of files including TCP 21 large files that may not be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICMP User Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic or routing purposes ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IGMP User Defined 2 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is MULTI CAST used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transpor
4. New Connection Login Info Request Login Credentials o POPEO Authentication Request SA D Authentication Reply Session Granted Denied 18 1 2 MAC Authentication MAC authentication works in a very similar way to IEEE 802 1x authentication The main difference is that the Switch does not prompt the client for login credentials The login credentials are based on the source MAC address of the MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication client connecting to a port on the Switch along with a password configured specifically for MAC authentication on the Switch Figure 88 MAC Authentication Process bo ON gee i Q 1 ill ll New Connection Authentication Request Itsy EO E Authentication Reply Session Granted Denied 18 2 Port Authentication Configuration To enable port authentication first activate the port authentication method s you want to use both on the Switch and the port s then configure the RADIUS server settings in the Auth and Acct gt Radius Server Setup screen Click Advanced Application gt Port Authentication in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 89 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication Fort Authentication 802 1x MAC Authentication Click here Click here MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 167 Chapter 18 Port Authentication
5. u DC INPUT Signal slot Ethernet Ports Dual Personality Interfaces MGS 3712F The following figure shows the front panel of the MGS 3712F The front panel contains the Switch LEDs 8 slots for mini GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter transceivers also known as SFP Single form factor Pluggable transceivers four dual personality interfaces each consisting of a mini GBIC slot and a 1000BASE T MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 33 Chapter 3 Hardware Overview RJ 45 port one console and one management port for local management and a slot for alarm management Figure 9 Front Panel MGS 3712F LEDs Console Port Management Port Z XEL CONSOLE y MGS 3712F 2 E IH E S E Io ani an i Ir i x wal 8 amp Laje 9a eee ra u a m m m m m a e onor ma PEE Ped FPS Ape E UNE mmm m anas D IE IE LI o Seine wmm a a a E E a mms PEOR 100 240VAC AMG E a m a m a o T EN 50 60Hz 0 6A MAX 7 7 p l Signal slot ini GBIC slot i Mini GBIC Slots Dual Personality Interfaces The following table describes the port labels on the front panel Table 1
6. c Port Base Setting Wizard Portisolation Apply Incoming 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 u n e CC C 7 eel CCGG r rr sr rNAEEEREREN r rrr er HE NENNEN NEN e Tr Fr r r v NENEENEREN r W o v 0 07 0 ORE owns CIEE Cos C c EIFI ole r c 7 ERES Mole 7 5 c REN ee et Ct O v NEN u rr rr rae NEN NN m O n rr rrr ERR TF n ceu v iv Iv M M Iv Iv M M Iv Vv Ilo cpu 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 nu n Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 Port Based VLAN Setup label Description Setting Choose All connected or Port isolation Wizard All connected means all ports can communicate with each other that is there are no virtual LANs All incoming and outgoing ports are selected This option is the most flexible but also the least secure Port isolation means that each port can only communicate with the CPU management port and cannot communicate with each other All incoming ports are selected while only the CPU outgoing port is selected This option is the most limiting but also the most secure After you make your selection click Apply top right of screen to display the screens as mentioned above You can still customize these settings by adding deleting incoming or outgoing ports but you must also click Apply at the bottom of the screen Incoming These are the ingress ports an ingress port is an incoming port
7. Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 30 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP continued Delay second LABEL DESCRIPTION Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits second a configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without second receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Changed Times Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Topology This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MSTP click MSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Section 13 1 5 on page 128 for more information on MSTP Fig
8. 24 8 MVR Group Configuration All source ports and receiver ports belonging to a multicast group can receive multicast data sent to this multicast group Configure MVR IP multicast group address es in the Group Configuration screen Click Group Configuration in the MVR screen MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 217 Chapter 24 Multicast Note A port can belong to more than one multicast VLAN However IP multicast group addresses in different multicast VLANs cannot overlap Figure 112 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration OFT c D VR Multicast VLAN ID Name Start Address End Address 0 0 0 0 fo 0 0 0 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Select a multicast VLAN ID that you configured in the MVR screen from VLAN ID the drop down list box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes Start Enter the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted Address decimal notation Refer to Section 24 1 1 on page 205 for more information on IP multicast addresses End Address Enter the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation
9. General Egress Type the number of an outgoing port Port Priority Specify a priority level DSCP Specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 TOS Specify the type of service TOS priority level Metering You can configure the desired bandwidth available to a traffic flow Traffic that exceeds the maximum bandwidth allocated in cases where the network is congested is called out of profile traffic Bandwidth Specify the bandwidth in kilobit per second Kbps Enter a number between 1 and 1000000 Out of Specify a new DSCP number between 0 and 63 if you want to replace or Ee remark the DSCP number for out of profile traffic Action Specify the action s the Switch takes on the associated classified traffic flow Forwarding Select No change to forward the packets Select Discard the packet to drop the packets Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to retain the frames that were marked to be dropped before Priority Select No change to keep the priority setting of the frames Select Set the packet s 802 1 priority to replace the packet s 802 1 priority field with the value you set in the Priority field Select Send the packet to priority queue to put the packets in the designated queue Select Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value to replace the packet s 802 1 priority field with the value you set in the TOS field Diffserv Sel
10. Prec 151 151 Broadcast San Contool Sep airinn ERE ETA eA 151 Chapter 16 jy 4 pe A E E E E A E E A 153 15 1 FOE MINOS GOID cirrasireinaicos terordinare tar eea te OE eia 153 Chapter 17 Link Dol oi 155 171 Onk ee sso MV Tp 155 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Table of Contents 162 Dreame Link Agge gaon 355 binis aa ines ERAT 155 1452 4 Link PUD T E E co Rub ae eS emu case cil nda da RU RdaDRs Sx mua pd 156 TZ 3 Link Sos esa CUIUS accedat ore nene Moeitcus uelis Elbe anc e tub E csi reso ERR enc os imas 157 17A DK ADOIISOSUDI SERO npdssteediu enia atest reds SERI Edd ates Uae taped bcc a ats 159 175 Link Aggregation Control Protocol sisi nse duaeto Fed eui tra RE Rn ER o E edv tan Poe d dap pe dae pE E beds 161 jp vcri redzr loo E 162 Chapter 18 Port jii 165 18 1 Port Authentication ri MITES a aA 165 18 1 4 IEEE 8021x Cip siorcanna Era Eara 165 15 1 2 MAC AOS OTS GO arauon E A cest nda aera oh 166 18 2 Port Authentication COoHIGUSEDIT pesivien e ku AEETI 167 18 21 Activate IEEE BOZ IX ic n0 doc 168 18 2 2 Activate MAC Authentication sseessssssssssssseseeeee ennt nnne 169 Chapter 19 n 171 pm About Fon SCAN e 171 8 2 Pon Secuty Se agi e etd a ROO lt wr dr aca ANA 172 13 3 VLAN RC sup AN We 174 Chapter 20 OU NER RE RR
11. 177 20 1 ADOT ila SSS and COS uppccadpi paiva iad pad uu Eee Ba od Rn eu En a af pedi iube 177 20 2 Omi he CISC SIG scutes mem 177 20 9 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration sic cnccisstetcicccotsnseniineececncanertenstunravoocsumenssaa 180 mier dci PRINTS 182 Chapter 21 Policy FUNG H Y OO 185 LEFI Pibe Nena Aet TIR TTE 185 CANNE pc A TC H 185 21 1 2 DSCGP and Pet Hop BERI cousitusoxsiecenpusataxbe uctus Onda Feed asbl vara Gaeta Cd baa 185 212 pmtigunnp Foley RUES uiii treni EE eet ae reip bnnc eeu co Gr eei Bol aea 186 21 3 Viewing and Editing Policy Cobiqu DO auc irc erret ke Por nd rct Her rt e cU Re 189 P Sos E P mee T ET 191 Chapter 22 snc 193 22 1 Cueuing Method Devi i assise etes ERR I pli n E acad d Rare TR P d er agat Rd 193 Fc En e dU se ETE 193 22 1 2 Weighted Fair CUOI oriin o cca e na ME Des UR DR PRI nU ERE RS 193 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 15 Table of Contents 22 1 3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR cccccccseeeeseeeeeceeeeeneeeeeaeeseaaeeeeees 194 vob TIN Re MI P I ENTER Eo M 195 Chapter 23 WLAN En 197 ZIV VLAN Stac Ring Rs ru e 197 LX VLAN Stacking MNS NEED 197 292 VLAN SiSeRIRO Port PIOIBE uiis prse Dog a li Qbbr bc ra pi eeE 198 02 VLAN TO FONN s qu
12. MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 8 5 Switch Setup Screen Click Basic Setting gt Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown The VLAN setup screens change depending on whether you choose 802 1Q or Port Based in the VLAN Type field in this screen Refer to the chapter on VLAN Figure 44 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup D Switch Setup 302 10 enone C PortBased Bridge Control Protocol Transparency Active ri MAC Address Learning Aging Time 00 seconds Join Timer oo milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer 500 milliseconds Leave All Timer fi 0000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment evel 7s evelb 6 evel s evel4 4 evel3 3 evel2 fi gt evel o evel 2 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Choose 802 1Q or Port Based The VLAN Setup screen changes depending on whether you choose 802 1Q VLAN type or Port Based VLAN type in this screen See Chapter 9 on page 95 for more information Bridge Control Select Active to allow the Switch to handle bridging control protocols Protocol STP for example You also need to define how to treat a BPDU in the Transparency Port Setup screen MAC Address MAC address learning reduces outgoing traffic broadcasts For MAC Learning address learning to occ
13. c all Establish Only C others Dec IP Address 0008 A Address Prefix G Any Socket Number IP Address ooo amd Address Prefix 4000 Any Socket Number Add Cancel Clear MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 21 1 21 1 1 21 1 2 Policy Rule This chapter shows you how to configure policy rules Policy Rules Overview A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria refer to Chapter 20 on page 177 for more information A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested treatment in the network DiffServ DiffServ Differentiated Services is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of S
14. Index This field displays a sequential number for each log message Port This field displays the source port of the ARP packet VID This field displays the source VLAN ID of the ARP packet Sender Mac This field displays the source MAC address of the ARP packet Sender IP This field displays the source IP address of the ARP packet MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 253 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 82 ARP Inspection Log Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Num Pkts This field displays the number of ARP packets that were consolidated into this log message The Switch consolidates identical log messages generated by ARP packets in the log consolidation interval into one log message You can configure this interval in the ARP Inspection Configure screen See Section 26 7 on page 254 Reason This field displays the reason the log message was generated dhcp deny An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a dynamic binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID static deny An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID deny An ARP packet was discarded because there were no bindings with the same MAC address and VLAN ID dhcp permit An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a dynamic binding static permit An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a static binding In the ARP Inspection VLAN Configure screen you can
15. Active Select this to activate accounting for a specified event types Broadcast Select this to have the Switch send accounting information to all configured accounting servers at the same time If you don t select this and you have two accounting servers set up then the Switch sends information to the first accounting server and if it doesn t get a response from the accounting server then it tries the second accounting server Mode The Switch supports two modes of recording login events Select start stop to have the Switch send information to the accounting server when a user begins a session during a user s session if it lasts past the Update Period and when a user ends a session stop only to have the Switch send information to the accounting server only when a user ends a session Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS for accounting of specific types of events TACACS is the only method for recording Commands type of event Privilege This field is only configurable for Commands type of event Select the threshold command privilege level for which the Switch should send accounting information The Switch will send accounting information when commands at the level you specify and higher are executed on the Switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the
16. EEE 802 1p defines up to eight separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port Use the next fields to configure the priority level to physical queue mapping The Switch has eight physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels On the Switch traffic assigned to higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested Priority Level The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates the 802 1p Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Level 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth Level 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed b
17. and single spanning tree devices A network may contain multiple MST regions and other network segments running RSTP Figure 70 MSTP and Legacy RSTP Network Example Region 2 Region 3 n s LJ Physical Connection RSTP on the Link 13 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen The Spanning Tree Protocol status screen changes depending on what standard you choose to implement on your network Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol to see the screen as shown Figure 71 Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Bridge Bridge ID Hello Time second Max Age second Forwarding Delay second Cost to Bridge Port ID Topology Changed Times Time Since Last Change Spanning Tree Protocol Status Root 0000 000000000000 0 0 0 0 0x0000 Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Our Bridge 0000 000000000000 0 0 0 0 00 00 This screen differs depending on which STP mode RSTP MRSTP or MSTP you configure on the Switch This screen is described in detail in the section that follows the configuration section for each STP mode Click Configuration to activate one of the STP standards on the Switch MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide E Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 3 Spanning Tree Configuration Use the Spanning Tree Configuration screen to activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Click Configuration in the Advanced Applicatio
18. 18 2 1 Activate IEEE 802 1x Security Use this screen to activate IEEE 802 1x security In the Port Authentication screen click 802 1x to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 90 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x Orns Or ni 4 00 N20 egies Fee NMioioi00 EVAR Port Authentication Active O Active Reauthentication Reauthentication Timer r Onz seconds El On 3600 seconds m On 3600 seconds C Onz 3600 seconds O On 3600 seconds Onz 3600 seconds ri On 3600 seconds ri on 3600 seconds C On 3600 seconds O on 3600 seconds m Onz 3600 seconds Li On 3600 seconds ri on 3600 seconds Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit 802 1x authentication on the Switch Note You must first enable 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Port This field displays the port number m Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this checkbox to permit 802 1x authentication on this port
19. Apply m Add Cancel Name IP Mask Bits VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this subnet based VLANs on the Switch DHCP Vlan When DHCP snooping is enabled DHCP clients can renew their IP address Override through the DHCP VLAN or via another DHCP server on the subnet based VLAN Select this checkbox to force the DHCP clients in this IP subnet to obtain their IP addresses through the DHCP VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Active Check this box to activate the IP subnet VLAN you are creating or editing Name Enter up to 32 alpha numeric characters to identify this subnet based VLAN IP Enter the IP address of the subnet for which you want to configure this subnet based VLAN MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Mask Bits Enter the bit number of the subnet mask To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary fo
20. Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All Switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the sa
21. Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 1 Make your physical connections make sure that the ports that you want to belong to the trunk group are connected to the same destination The following figure shows ports 2 5 on switch A connected to switch B Figure 85 Trunking Example Physical Connections 2 Configure static trunking Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting n this screen activate trunking group T1 select the traffic distribution algorithm used by this group and select the ports that should belong to this group as shown in the figure below Click Apply when you are done Figure 86 Trunking Example Configuration Screen Status LACP Group ID Active Criteria Ti T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 src dst mac src dst mac a a DEBERI Port Group Apply Cancel MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation Your trunk group 1 T1 configuration is now complete you do not need to go to any additional screens MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 18 1 18 1 1 Port Authentication This chapter describes the IEEE 802 1x and MAC authentication methods Port Authentication Overview Port authentication is a way to validate access to ports on the Switch to clients based on an external server authentication server The Switch supports the following methods for port authentication IEEE 802 1x An authentication server va
22. Note For proper ventilation allow at least 4 inches 10 cm of clearance at the front and 3 4 inches 8 cm at the back of the Switch This is especially important for enclosed rack installations 2 2 Desktop Installation Procedure 1 Make sure the Switch is clean and dry 2 Set the Switch on a smooth level surface strong enough to support the weight of the Switch and the connected cables Make sure there is a power outlet nearby 3 Make sure there is enough clearance around the Switch to allow air circulation and the attachment of cables and the power cord 4 Remove the adhesive backing from the rubber feet MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 5 Attach the rubber feet to each corner on the bottom of the Switch These rubber feet help protect the Switch from shock or vibration and ensure space between devices when stacking Figure 5 Attaching Rubber Feet Note Do NOT block the ventilation holes Leave space between devices when stacking 2 3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack The Switch can be mounted on an EIA standard size 19 inch rack or in a wiring closet with other equipment Follow the steps below to mount your Switch on a standard EIA rack using a rack mounting kit 2 3 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements Two mounting brackets Eight M3 flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver Four M5 flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver Failure t
23. 13 7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 13 1 on page 125 for more information on MRSTP Note This screen is only available after you activate MRSTP on the Switch Figure 76 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP a Spanning Iree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP MO Tree Protocol MRSTP Tree 1 Y Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 8000 001349000002 8000 001349000002 Hello Time second 2 2 Max Age second 20 20 Forwarding Delay second 15 15 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click MRSTP to edit MRSTP settings on the Switch Tree Select which STP tree configuration you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide
24. Delete Group Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 News 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 220 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide AAA This chapter describes how to configure authentication authorization and accounting settings on the Switch 25 1 Authentication Authorization and Accounting AAA Authentication is the process of determining who a user is and validating access to the Switch The Switch can authenticate users who try to log in based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself The Switch can also use an external authentication server to authenticate a large number of users Authorization is the process of determining what a user is allowed to do Different user accounts may have higher or lower privilege levels associated with them For example user A may have the right to create new login accounts on the Switch but user B cannot The Switch can authorize users based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself or it can use an external server to authorize a large number of users Accounting is the process of recording what a user is doing The Switch can use an external server to track when users log in log out execute commands and so on Accounting can also record system related actions such as boot up and shut down times of the Switch The external servers that perform authentication authorization and accounting functions are known as AAA servers The Switch supports RADIUS Remote Authentication D
25. Instance This field displays the ID of an MST instance VLAN This field displays the VID or VID ranges to which the MST instance is mapped Active Port This field display the ports configured to participate in the MST instance MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 31 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 9 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 13 1 5 on page 128 for more information on MSTP Note This screen is only available after you activate MSTP on the Switch Figure 78 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP CST Bridge Bridge ID Hello Time second Max Age second Forwarding Delay second Cost to Bridge Port ID Configuration Name Revision Number Configuration Digest Topology Changed Times Time Since Last Change Instance Instance 0 MSTI 1 Bridge Bridge ID Internal Cost Port ID Spanning Tree Protocol Status Root 0000 000000000000 0 0 0 0 0x0000 A31 Regional Root 0000 000000000000
26. The Switch checks incoming traffic from the switch ports non management ports against the VLAN mapping table first the MAC learning table and then the VLAN table before forwarding them through the Gigabit uplink port When VLAN mapping is enabled the Switch discards the tagged packets that do not match an entry in the VLAN mapping table If the incoming packets are untagged the Switch adds a PVID based on the VLAN setting Note You can not enable VLAN mapping and VLAN stacking at the same time 28 1 1 VLAN Mapping Example In the following example figure packets that carry VLAN ID 12 and are received on port 3 match a pre configured VLAN mapping rule The Switch translates the VLAN ID from 12 into 123 before forwarding the packets Any packets carrying a VLAN tag other than 12 such as 10 and received on port 3 will be dropped Figure 141 VLAN mapping example Service Provider Network MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 28 VLAN Mapping 28 2 Enabling VLAN Mapping Click Advanced Application and then VLAN Mapping in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 142 VLAN Mapping Ku pping VLAN Mapping Configure Active rH Port Active Oo 1 O 2 m 3 LH 4 C 5 E 6 O 7 O 8 C 9 C 10 r1 11 O 12 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 87 VLAN Mapping LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to ena
27. To emulate a point to point topology between two customer switches at different sites such as A and B you can enable protocol tunneling on edge switches 1 and MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 29 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling 29 1 1 2 for PAgP Port Aggregation Protocol LACP or UDLD UniDirectional Link Detection Figure 145 L2PT Network Example 1 Service Provider s Network Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Mode Each port can have two layer 2 protocol tunneling modes Access and Tunnel The Access port is an ingress port on the service provider s edge device 1 or 2 in Figure 145 on page 270 and connected to a customer switch A or B Incoming layer 2 protocol packets received on an access port are encapsulated and forwarded to the tunnel ports The Tunnel port is an egress port at the edge of the service provider s network and connected to another service provider s switch Incoming encapsulated layer 2 protocol packets received on a tunnel port are decapsulated and sent to an access port 270 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 29 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling 29 2 Configuring Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Click Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 146 Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Layer 2 Protocol Tunne Active Destination MAC Address 00 no DO oo DO 00
28. Need More Help More help is available at www zyxel com ET ET N Download Library gt Firmware Knowledge Base Software Glossary Driver Support amp Feedback Datasheet Warranty Information Tech Doc Overview ZyXEL Windows Vista Support User s Guide Forum Quick start guide CLI Reference Guide Support note Certification Declaration SNMP MIB File Download Library Search for the latest product updates and documentation from this link Read the Tech Doc Overview to find out how to efficiently use the User Guide Quick Start Guide and Command Line Interface Reference Guide in order to better understand how to use your product Knowledge Base If you have a specific question about your product the answer may be here This is a collection of answers to previously asked questions about ZyXEL products Forum This contains discussions on ZyXEL products Learn from others who use ZyXEL products and share your experiences as well Customer Support Should problems arise that cannot be solved by the methods listed above you should contact your vendor If you cannot contact your vendor then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device See http www zyxel com web contact us php for contact information Please have the following information ready when you contact an office Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief desc
29. can be left idle before the session times out After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 34 10 Remote Management Click Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management to view the screen as shown next MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 327 Chapter 34 Access Control You can specify a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Click Access Control to return to the Access Control screen Figure 182 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management Remote Management Secured Client Setup Access Control Entry Active Start Address End Address Telnet FIP HTTP ICMP SNMP SSH HTTPS 1 WF ono foooo FM W FW NM HF NM FB 2 H no o Oo mn 8 6 mn Fn 3 n lon oo pnmnnnun nu n Hm uo qua t D D du 0 uu 0 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 112 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Entry This is the client s
30. 0 0 0 0 in band C Outofband DHCP Client Static IP Address IP Address 216811 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Default Gateway ono VID a IP Address 2158801 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel In band IP Addresses IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Default Gateway Index IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel IP Subnet Mask VID Default Gateway Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 Basic Setting gt IP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Domain Name DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its Server corresponding IP address and vice versa Enter a domain name server IP address in order to be able to use a domain name instead of an IP address MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 11 Basic Setting gt IP Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Specify which traffic flow In Band or Out of band the Switch is to Management send packets originating from itself such as SNMP traps or packets with unknown source Select Out of band to have the Switch send the packets to the out of band management port This means that device s connected to the other port s do not receive these packets Select I n Band to have the Switch send the packets to all ports except the out of band management port t
31. 1234 A non administrator username is something other than admin is someone who can view but not configure Switch settings Click Management gt Access Control gt Logins to view the screen as shown next Figure 173 Management Access Control Logins Logins d Access Control Administrator Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Edit Logins Login User Name Password Retype to confirm iut ee ee 4 INSERERE GN Se DE C REID Kin eost 1 E US E St Geese A pamm dA emerge Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 110 Management gt Access Control gt Logins LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator This is the default administrator account with the admin user name You cannot change the default administrator user name Only the administrator has read write access Old Password Type the existing system password 1234 is the default password when shipped New Password Enter your new system password MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 34 Access Control Table 110 Management gt Access Control gt Logins continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Retype to Retype your new system password for confirmation confirm Edit Logins You may configure passwords for up to four use
32. 170 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit MAC authentication on the Switch Note You must first enable MAC authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Name Prefix Type the prefix that is appended to all MAC addresses sent to the RADIUS server for authentication You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters If you leave this field blank then only the MAC address of the client is forwarded to the RADIUS server Password Type the password the Switch sends along with the MAC address of a client for authentication with the RADIUS server You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters Timeout Specify the amount of time before the Switch allows a client MAC address that fails authentication to try and authenticate again Maximum time is 3000 seconds When a client fails MAC authentication its MAC address is learned by the MAC address table with a status of denied The timeout period you specify here is the time the MAC address entry stays in the MAC address table until it is cleared If you specify 0 for the timeout value then this entry will not be deleted from the MAC address table Note If the Aging Time in the Switch Setup screen is set toa lower value then it supersedes this setting See Section 8 5 on page 85 Port This
33. 24 3 Multicast Setting Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting link to display the screen as shown See Section 24 1 on page 205 for more information on multicasting Figure 106 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting OM iS Multicast Status IGMP Snooping VLAN IGMP Filtering Profile MVR Active E Querier Im IGMP Snooping Host Timeout peo 8021p Priority No Change v IGMP Filtering Active ri Unknown Multicast Frame Flooding Drop Reserved Multicast Group OI Flooding Drop Port immed Natalee East Leas croup Max Group Throttling IGMP Filtering IGMP Querier Leave Limited Num Profile Mode c clon lobo r b wy Bj B ano B 2 c o c po rH b Dey Ni pen Auto i 3 c eh poo T B ey B oeuf auto M 1 ekoa cho r b Dey Bi Dan Auto M s c ehxe c po ri B ey ao Au M 6 C c oo co r p Deny Defaut Auto z 7 c wo cho r bp Dy Bj p Auto I 8 c ekoo cfpo m p Deny Dtz auc gt 9 c ejoo c po r p Dey Defaut Auto z w C elw poo r B Deny Mi Denm auto M s C ekwa cho Op Deny Mj pg auto ij 2 C o cho r Deny Defaut Auto v Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Snooping Use these settings to configure IGMP Snooping Active Select Active to enable IGMP S
34. Chapter 25 AAA The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 67 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Server Use this section to configure your TACACS authentication settings Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple TACACS servers Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured TACACS server if the TACACS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second TACACS server Select round robin to alternate between the TACACS servers that it sends authentication requests to Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the TACACS server If you are using index priority for your authentication and you are using two TACACS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two TACACS servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a response from the first TACACS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second TACACS server Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS server in dotted decimal notation TCP Port The default port of a TACACS server for authentication is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator
35. Enter the same IP address as the Start Address field if you want to configure only one IP address for a multicast group Refer to Section 24 1 1 on page 205 for more information on IP multicast addresses Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MVLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Start This field displays the starting IP address of the multicast group Address MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Table 64 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION End Address This field displays the ending IP address of the multicast group Delete Select Delete Group and click Delete to remove the selected entry ies from the table Cancel Select Cancel to clear the checkbox es in the table 24 8 1 MVR Configuration Example The following figure shows a network example where ports 1 2 and 3 on the Switch belong to VLAN 1 In addition port 7 belongs to the multicast group with VID 200 to receive multicast traffic the News and Movie channels from t
36. MER I C Mc TU TRENT ican T 67 BOT CRUDO LEE aiia com lx pauta mtra iun aa a c aU apa Cu n 67 Eus cua o d lo M 68 6 2 Configuring Switch Management IP Address ssssssesesseseseseeeeeene nnns 70 Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics isiscssiiccssisssesaccsiascssiaresiadnsiserisastensassisasseuasinieacaniasiniacianneans 73 poE Uo fee E 73 TEF Saws SUMA aiena EE E een AR N 73 12 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Table of Contents Feo ete POM x c nia 75 Chapter 8 Base SENO MM a ne Se re een ere eee een meer 79 MEN I P PT a EU ET 79 uec GM reni 80 tecto ber c NM EDO D T TM 82 x Mrngee IG INST Tk a Rol ipee tte UE UN 84 Co eha OWP CIEE EUR TREES 85 CoP a NE eM ER E ERN rere norte trem ene errr Te reer terete 87 58 5 1 Management IF Adress scsuccccssceessnacmsnnssneneuseenisnreurerssnremnenntd E S ANS 87 FFON a T E A Nach aes 91 P r HE L Bn er nen AE 93 Chapter 9 piro E M A 95 9 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLANSs sss 95 9 1 4 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames eio tette rte repre rices 95 2 2 Automate VLAN Fegi taloi sanien rni gae kai pagi gan gae raa boa 96 cu ECOL amem 96 MR E 96 So PULL TED dodcsseioduu eno do EE Rau EY yup DICE ES Rau Eee CUu Na DOMO entre EVE LOU ELE 97 CE Saet TG eus M 98 OLS ial DEO Wc T MIR ENNUNS
37. Port e oo 74 c Cn 4 co M lit am n et Niet oO o Uv Uu v Point to Point PAGP LACP UDLD O C Mode 4 TREE Access Access Access Access Access Access Access Access Access Access Access Access Doo iii Goi EER GOs bh HaHa Deo aoe mainininniniunmnunnnunuls DE DHBIBEEHB DCEOE EDBEDEBIBH EI ego a HaHaHa fg HE EEO GOB Oo oe oi OEO Access Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 89 Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling MAC Address LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable layer 2 protocol tunneling on the Switch Destination Specify an MAC address with which the Switch uses to encapsulate the layer 2 protocol packets by replacing the destination MAC address in the packets Note The MAC address can be either a unicast MAC address or multicast MAC address If you use a unicast MAC address make sure the MAC address does not exist in the address table of a switch on the service provider s network Note All the edge switches in the service provider s network should be set to use the same MAC address for encapsulation Port This field displays the port number MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 271 Chapter 29 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling 272 Table 89 Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling continued LABEL DESC
38. Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA 25 2 4 Vendor Specific Attribute RFC 2865 standard specifies a method for sending vendor specific information between a RADIUS server and a network access device for example the Switch A company can create Vendor Specific Attributes VSAs to expand the functionality of a RADIUS server The Switch supports VSAs that allow you to perform the following actions based on user authentication Limit bandwidth on incoming or outgoing traffic for the port the user connects to Assign account privilege levels See the CLI Reference Guide for more information on account privilege levels for the authenticated user The VSAs are composed of the following Vendor ID An identification number assigned to the company by the IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority ZyXEL s vendor ID is 890 Vendor Type A vendor specified attribute identifying the setting you want to modify Vendor data A value you want to assign to the setting Note Refer to the documentation that comes with your RADIUS server on how to configure VSAs for users authenticating via the RADIUS server The following table describes the VSAs supported on the Switch Table 69 Supported VSAs FUNCTI
39. Select this option to have the Switch send LACP packets to a peer to dynamically creates and manages trunk groups UDLD Select this option to have the Switch send UDLD packets to a peer s port it connected to monitor the physical status of a link Mode Select Access to have the Switch encapsulate the incoming layer 2 protocol packets and forward them to the tunnel port s Select Access for ingress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Note You can enable L2PT services for STP LACP VTP CDP UDLD and PAGP on the access port s only Select Tunnel for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network The Switch decapsulates the encapsulated layer 2 protocol packets received on a tunnel port by changing the destination MAC address to the original one and then forward them to an access port If the service s is not enabled on an access port the protocol packets are dropped Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide PART IV IP Application Static Route 275 Differentiated Services 279 DHCP 287 273 274 30 1 Static Route This chapter
40. Select this option to set this port as the MVR source port that sends and receives multicast traffic All source ports must belong to a single multicast VLAN Receiver Port Select this option to set this port as a receiver port that only receives multicast traffic None Select this option to set the port not to participate in MVR No MVR multicast traffic is sent or received on this port Tagging Select this checkbox if you want the port to tag the VLAN ID in all outgoing frames transmitted Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Active This field displays whether the multicast group is enabled or not Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Mode This field displays the MVR mode Source Port This field displays the source port number s Receiver Port This field displays the receiver port number s 802 1p This field displays the priority level Delete To delete a multicast VLAN s select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes
41. Spanning Tree Proto 125 TSS TPS TP ye cc EE 125 TT ae PBMCS eise z edu ce cR ecd ative erat Ek xar gai oL Rina a e auam REGEM ED 125 1S Ls RON SIF VO B Jaccteondddtbectdpt a Pup aa eR nee brine to UR EB ee TERES PER 126 TO TP PE SURG prosassaquidahitaxptage pod gat pooug pun i tte as a bubo Gap dau 127 NE MUNE RSI dec 127 cd MURDO GTP cmm 128 13 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status SOIB 2 x pelis pen Rr x PER EUR Rad ERR RE DRRRE OA EEER AR ada 131 19 3 Spanning Tres CODMNIQUESEGIT ausesoctunicn tieu Sa pte ERO Poe UR EEUU E PPUXdER UEM ER 132 13 4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protogol iaces sierra epa tne rere nnne Erase een aas 133 13 5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Sigs aussnseusendaseeinicat raagnh ae duke senda a 135 13 6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol sssssseeees 137 13 7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status sese 139 13 8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol sssesessseseseeeeneennne nnns 141 13 9 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status sseeeescseeeece tte ck sno repu ture pa nosse pudiese 144 Chapter 14 Bandwidth ge 147 141 Bandwidth Control VeRO oust iparnsiaornsniteeanienistia urge a a i 147 LX AUS and PIR eranen aR m TT 147 DES Bandi Contool SEW a eer iogebce aaRS EAA 148 Chapter 15 Broadcast Stori COMO
42. Static MAC address forwarding MAC Freeze IEEE 802 1x port based authentication Limiting number of dynamic MAC addresses per port SSH v1 v2 SSL Intrusion Lock Multiple RADI US servers Multiple TACACS servers 802 1X VLAN and bandwidth assignment IP source guard Static IP MAC binding DHCP snooping ARP Inspection MAC authentication MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 42 Product Specifications The following list which is not exhaustive illustrates the standards supported in the Switch Table 127 Standards Supported STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 826 Address Resolution Protocol ARP RFC 867 Daytime Protocol RFC 868 Time Protocol RFC 894 Ethernet II Encapsulation RFC 1112 IGMP v1 RFC 1155 SMI RFC 1157 SNMPv1 Simple Network Management Protocol version 1 RFC 1213 SNMP MIB II RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol NTP version 3 RFC 1441 SNMPv2 Simple Network Management Protocol version 2 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs RFC 1757 RMON RFC 1901 SNMPv2c Simple Network Management Protocol version 2c RFC 2138 RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2139 RADIUS Accounting RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 2 RFC 2698 Two Rate Three Color Marker trTCM RFC 2865 RADIUS Vendor Specific Attribute RFC 2674 P BRI DGE MIB Q BRI DGE MIB RFC 3046 DH
43. The following table shows some common protocol types and the corresponding protocol number Refer to http www iana org assignments protocol numbers for a complete list Table 48 Common IP Protocol Types and Protocol Numbers PROTOCOL TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER ICMP 1 TCP 6 UDP 17 EGP 8 L2TP 115 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier Some of the most common TCP and UDP port numbers are Table 49 Common TCP and UDP Port Numbers PROTOCOL NAME TCP UDP PORT NUMBER FTP 21 Telnet 23 SMTP 25 DNS 53 HTTP 80 POP3 110 See Appendix A on page 367 for information on commonly used port numbers 20 4 Classifier Example The following screen shows an example where you configure a classifier that identifies all traffic from MAC address 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 on port 2 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier After you have configured a classifier you can configure a policy in the Policy screen to define action s on the classified traffic flow Figure 96 Classifier Example Ce clas Active Name Layer 2 Layer 3 Packet Format sirier Vv Example All VLAN Priority Ethernet Type Destination DSCP IP Protocol Source Destination X Any c Any c osi e all Any MAC Address macho po pe a e om Any Port D Any MAC Address wel C BD E C Any o
44. last binary bit of the first octet pair in a multicast MAC address must be 1 For example the first octet pair 00000001 is 01 and 00000011 is 03 in hexadecimal so 01 00 5e 00 00 0A and 03 00 5e 00 00 27 are valid multicast MAC addresses VID You can forward frames with matching destination MAC address to port s within a VLAN group Enter the ID that identifies the VLAN group here If you don t have a specific target VLAN enter 1 Port Enter the port s where frames with destination MAC address that matched the entry above are forwarded You can enter multiple ports separated by no space comma or hyphen For example enter 3 5 for ports 3 4 and 5 Enter 3 5 7 for ports 3 5 and 7 Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this rule if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values Clear Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh Index Click an index number to modify a static multicast MAC address rule for port s MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 121 Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forward Setup Table 22 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field displays whether a static m
45. n 38 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Table of Contents Dia POWSPLODDEEIBE arrani AA N enna ua ann 38 OULB CIN oP cases A sa deisel aaah on eae rn aid a ay heer de luda oe Ded Fac api ta dub cd 40 Sa ou Pe 42 TO LEDE Rm C M 43 ad EOC IMEI TE SONG asso e ics bee orate Rex deleto dr dpt Pres R 44 Chapter 4 e Uos O O O0oe 45 4 1 How to Use DHOP Snooping on the SWIER 2e e erit nra Renee ti oae DLE a n ra edes 45 4 2 How to Use DHCP Relay Gh the WU usur oai ort aac cer Ern p uo e Rua kso nulia acu ad 49 42 DHEP Relay Tutonal nodi uiccaseaseceo oo sete te eroe a aai 49 cEC Ore a K M i T 50 42e 050 9nd DHOE Bala siete vdd Feli deb meu ETEA 53 zwei 54 ux calHE tioDEv gs r M 55 Chapter 5 The Web d 57 2x IHESU NOI escasa pedi Fas dete doc na ES da cau dcr pP ES RUNGE eae 57 Dc SIS LOB reer eee tear Eee reece error erent rrr a i reer 57 Do The StS GOTON a ecc 58 TENGO Ed o RI UU 62 SASSA cr DE EIUS I ELE o t o 62 Se uenis ror at 62 Pi TU b E Merc sem 63 5 8 1 Reload the Conflauralion FIE 2 rdoceo tree e Moe reperi nocent i a Rau deae pcenas 63 5 7 Logging OUI oF Ihe Web Conquer uere te ac eh Re id e RR dod ARDOR Hes 64 cR Wl peter a m T cen ferent rien teeter restr et Retr ntn eres 65 Chapter 6 ji 2 Y 67
46. temperature goes above or 5 2 1 below the normal operating range MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 2 5 2 1 TemperatureEventClear MGS 3712F This trap is sent when the 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 2 temperature returns to the 5 2 2 normal operating range MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 2 5 2 2 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 34 Access Control Table 103 SNMP System Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION voltage VoltageEventOn MGS 3712F This trap is sent when the 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 2 voltage goes above or below 5 2 1 the normal operating range MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 2 5 2 1 VoltageEventClear MGS 3712F This trap is sent when the 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 2 voltage returns to the normal 5 2 2 operating range MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 2 5 2 2 reset UncontrolledResetEventOn MGS 3712F This trap is sent when the 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 2 Switch automatically resets 5 2 1 MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 2 5 2 1 ControlledResetEventOn MGS 3712F This trap is sent when the 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 2 Switch resets by an 5 2 1 administrator through a management interface MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 2 5 2 1 RebootEvent MGS 3712F This trap is sent when the 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 0 1 Switch reboots by an administrator through a MGS 3712 management interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 0 1 timesync RTCNotUpdatedEventOn MGS
47. uplink bandwidth Active Select this check box to activate peak rate limits on this port MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 14 Bandwidth Control Table 33 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Peak Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for Rate the incoming traffic flow on a port Active Select this check box to activate egress rate limits on this port Egress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the out going traffic flow on a port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 14 Bandwidth Control MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Broadcast Storm Control This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the broadcast storm control feature 15 1 Broadcast Storm Control Setup Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast multicast and destination lookup failure DLF packets the Switch receives per second on the ports When the maximum number of allowable broadcast multicast and or DLF packets is reached per second the subsequent packets are d
48. 1 Tag based VLAN Example Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain thus increase network performance through reduced broadcast traffic VLAN groups can be modified at any time by adding moving or changing ports without any re cabling MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 25 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch Shared resources such as a server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server In the following figure only ports that need access to the server need to be part of VLAN 1 Ports can belong to other VLAN groups too Figure 4 Shared Server Using VLAN Example NE 1 VLAN 1 ees i i 3 i S OOA Niere VLAN 1 Nees VLAN 2 AE i I i WI P 3 PENIS em ii NE Hh NN gt ME 4 l eee ee i a DS I I NmXON L 1 L 1 LS c uu m o ee ee mt x a 1 2 Ways to Manage the Switch Use any of the following methods to manage the Switch Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the Switch using a supported web browser See Chapter 5 on page 57 Command Line Interface Line commands offer an alternative to the web configurator and in some cases are necessary to configure advanced features See the CLI Reference Guide FTP Use FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup restore See Section 33 8 on page 301 SNMP The Switch can be monitored by an SNMP manager See
49. 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Ping Host Successful 192 168 1 23 System Log Display Clear IP Ping IP Address Ping Ethernet Port Test Port 1 Port Test MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 35 Diagnostic The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 113 Management gt Diagnostic LABEL DESCRIPTION System Log Click Display to display a log of events in the multi line text box Click Clear to empty the text box and reset the syslog entry IP Ping Type the IP address of a device that you want to ping in order to test a connection Click Ping to have the Switch ping the IP address in the field to the left Ethernet Port Test Enter a port number and click Port Test to perform an internal loopback test MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide This chapter explains the syslog screens 36 1 Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages A syslog enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server Syslog is defined in RFC 3164 The RFC defines the packet format content and system log related information of syslog messages Each syslog message has a facility and severity level The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for
50. 1s is backward compatible with STP RSTP and addresses the limitations of existing spanning tree protocols STP and RSTP in networks to include the following features One Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST that represents the entire network s connectivity Grouping of multiple bridges or switching devices into regions that appear as one single bridge on the network A VLAN can be mapped to a specific Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTI MSTI allows multiple VLANs to use the same spanning tree Load balancing is possible as traffic from different VLANs can use distinct paths in a region MSTP Network Example The following figure shows a network example where two VLANs are configured on the two switches If the switches are using STP or RSTP the link for VLAN 2 will be MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol blocked as STP and RSTP allow only one link in the network and block the redundant link Figure 67 STP RSTP Network Example With MSTP VLANs 1 and 2 are mapped to different spanning trees in the network Thus traffic from the two VLANs travel on different paths The following figure shows the network example using MSTP Figure 68 MSTP Network Example 13 1 5 2 MST Region An MST region is a logical grouping of multiple network devices that appears as a single device to the rest of the network Each MSTP enabled device can only belong to one MST region When BP
51. 2 features 361 Layer 2 protocol tunneling see L2PT layer 3 features 362 LEDs 43 ALM 43 BPS 43 PWR 43 SYS 43 limit MAC address learning 173 Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP 155 link aggregation 155 dynamic 155 ID information 156 setup 159 161 status 157 traffic distribution algorithm 158 traffic distribution type 160 trunk group 155 lockout 62 log 330 login 57 password 62 login account Administrator 319 non administrator 319 login accounts 319 configuring via web configurator 319 multiple 319 number of 319 login password 320 loop guard 261 examples 262 port shut down 263 setup 263 vs STP 261 MAC Media Access Control 80 MAC address 80 347 maximum number per port 173 174 MAC address learning 85 105 108 115 173 specify limit 173 MAC authentication 165 aging time 170 example 166 setup 169 MAC filter and ARP inspection 238 MAC freeze 172 MAC table 343 display criteria 345 how it works 343 sorting criteria 345 transfer type 345 viewing 344 maintanence configuration backup 301 firmware 299 restoring configuration 300 maintenance 297 current configuration 297 main screen 297 Management Information Base MIB 306 management port 38 114 default IP address 38 managing the device good habits 26 using FTP See FTP 26 using Telnet See command interface 26 using the command interface See command interface 26 man in the middle attacks 238 max age 142 hops 142 MDIX Media Dependent Interface Cro
52. 225 MAC authentication 165 port based VLAN type 85 port cloning 349 350 advanced settings 349 350 basic settings 349 350 port details 75 port isolation 113 port mirroring 153 154 361 direction 154 egress 154 ingress 154 port redundancy 156 port security 171 limit MAC address learning 173 MAC address learning 171 overview 171 setup 172 263 271 port setup 91 port status 73 port VLAN ID see PVID 104 port VLAN trunking 97 port based VLAN 111 all connected 113 port isolation 113 settings wizard 113 ports standby 156 diagnostics 330 mirroring 153 speed duplex 92 power voltage 81 power connector 38 power consumption 357 power module current rating 39 power wire 39 power specification 357 power status 81 power wires 39 priority level 86 priority queue assignment 86 product registration 373 protocol based VLAN 107 and IEEE 802 1Q tagging 107 application example 107 configuration example 110 isolate traffic 107 priority 109 un tagged packets 107 PVID 96 PVID Priority Frame 96 PWR LED 43 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Index Q QoS 361 and classifier 177 Queue weight 196 queue weight 194 queuing 193 SPQ 194 WRR 194 Queuing algorithm 196 Queuing method 196 queuing method 193 R rack mounting 30 RADIUS 221 222 advantages 222 and port authentication 222 and tunnel protocol attribute 231 Network example 222 server 222 settings 223 setup 223 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
53. 3 Clustering Management Configuration Use this screen to configure clustering management Click Management gt Cluster Management gt Configuration to display the next screen Figure 190 Management gt Cluster Management gt Configuration Clustering Manager Active Name VID Clustering Candidate List Index Clustering Management Configuration Status 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 GS 2024 Password Iv Master fi Apply Cancel Add Cancel Refresh MacAddr Name Model Remove Remove Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 120 Management gt Cluster Management gt Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Clustering Manager Active Select Active to have this Switch become the cluster manager switch A cluster can only have one manager Other directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidates list If a switch that was previously a cluster member is later set to become a cluster manager then its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon A appears in the member summary list below Name Type a name to identify the Clustering Manager You may use up to 32 printable characters spaces are allowed MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 37 Cluster Management Table 120 Management gt Cluster Management gt Co
54. 3712F This trap is sent when the 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 2 Switch fails to get the time and 5 2 1 date from a time server MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 2 5 2 1 RTCNotUpdatedEventClear MGS 3712F This trap is sent when the 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 2 Switch gets the time and date 5 2 2 from a time server MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 2 5 2 2 intrusionloc IntrusionLockEventOn MGS 3712F This trap is sent when intrusion k 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 2 lock occurs on a port 5 2 1 MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 2 5 2 1 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 34 Access Control Table 103 SNMP System Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION loopguard LoopguardEventOn MGS 3712F 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 2 5 2 1 MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 2 5 2 1 This trap is sent when loopguard shuts down a port externalarm ExternalAlarmEventOn MGS 3712F 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 2 5 2 1 MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 2 5 2 1 This trap is sent when the external alarm is received ExternalAlarmEventClear MGS 3712F 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 2 5 2 2 MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 2 5 2 2 This trap is sent when the external alarm is stops sending an alert Table 104 SNMP InterfaceTraps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION linkup linkUp 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 This trap is sent
55. 98 TaT Genre SLAN OPUS m c cunalexuiecdannisdis cad EE aa 99 Ooa Mo Nel Mm 100 2g DHT tate VLAN diiirn einem OR be Hue b ab ra old 100 9 5 4 Contigure VLAN Port Selle aecuedutete ate epi edt teer BUR Ue ARE ite x SR ES EN AEEA 103 Bue Sune Based YLANG Ac 104 6 7 Contig rng Subnet Based VLAM unus oosaedresiea sedenti benda inesse Eat dui cras pda 105 S PIulecalBuSpd VLANS eitssiteutoxbietindepedudistbecihrdsobetigedieat Qusa Leu di doo eel pu OU dad au 107 99 Gontigudng Protecel Based VLAN usneodoqa uites ki Dani ia caine 108 9 10 Create an IP based VLAN Example i n eeepc tit Eua taken Eas Fan uu h ua dta d 110 CN gue eie sip casccsdsassccecainetaiccreniceiaiadneegncscuandeie E EEA DEEA 111 B TL Contgure a Parbbased VLAN iei ttc de ncn ated ebore a dcin d pod isis 112 Chapter 10 Static ned p 115 U NER 1 Pete pU 115 10 2 Configuring Statie MAG Forwarding unies aii ecrire aa or ec oc P acc RR Rt 115 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 13 Table of Contents Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forward l c 119 11 1 Static Multicast Forwarding Overview iceeesue esee erento tna sait kk ade tk ki gn ione 119 11 2 Configuring Static Multicast Forwarding sccctscccccssccocesascccsnmendecvennedesastanssevoreosetetdicreesniecy 120 Chapter 12 Exit UG MERI E EEE T 123 121 Comigure a aibi AR T T 123 Chapter 13
56. BoP QUE nE A a 261 SEAN led us T ET 265 Leer 2 Protocol TUNNEN ee S 269 ld M 273 IURE VIRI E E I E S S DS T 275 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 9 Contents Overview BEIDE NP I E T T 279 amp gH aet Tice cc CONO cte 287 L Y7OU 295 APTS INGE RE EE OD DA DL A AE 297 Access COMON crasma 305 D OnO E oa T 329 EE le E E N E E A be D E E E A T ee 331 Guster Mana EIGN siakiina AR RNA oete a ehieg 335 MAC T E e Lm a A 343 ARP TADE esrin ee e REE E EN 347 e pMtras saiia a 349 Troubleshooting amp Product Specifications cese 351 TOURS SONU dosi ovn n RPCXUERAS a vcR na Rav n ERE UR p P acus nen S Ru RE RR KR HEAR ER Pp ERE 353 Frodo spec Moai Meme TNR RTT 357 Appendices and NUEK e 365 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This Users Guide XX X H O OF v 3 pick li 4 5 c lk i1 e 7 geri 9 Table e E
57. Cluster Management Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field displays the role of this Switch within the cluster Manager Member you see this if you access this screen in the cluster member switch directly and not via the cluster manager None neither a manager nor a member of a cluster Manager This field displays the cluster manager switch s hardware MAC address The Number This field displays the number of switches that make up this cluster The of Member following fields describe the cluster member switches Index You can manage cluster member switches via the cluster manager switch Each number in the Index column is a hyperlink leading to the cluster member switch s web configurator see Figure 188 on page 338 MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This field displays the model name Status This field displays Online the cluster member switch is accessible Error for example the cluster member switch password was changed or the switch was set as the manager and so left the member list etc Offline the switch is disconnected Offline shows approximately 1 5 minutes after the link between cluster member and manager goes down 37 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management Go to the Clustering Management Status screen of the cluster manager switch and then select an Index hyperlink from the list of members
58. Cost Path 10Gbps 2 1to5 1 to 65535 Cost On each bridge the root port is the port through which this bridge communicates with the root It is the port on this switch with the lowest path cost to the root the root path cost If there is no root port then this switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network For each LAN segment a designated bridge is selected This bridge has the lowest cost to the root among the bridges connected to the LAN How STP Works After a bridge determines the lowest cost spanning tree with STP it enables the root port and the ports that are the designated ports for connected LANs and disables all other ports that participate in STP Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports eliminating any possible network loops STP aware switches exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs periodically When the bridged LAN topology changes a new spanning tree is constructed Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the root bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Max Age the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down This bridge then initiates negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to re establish a valid network topology MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Prot
59. GARP terminology 96 GARP timer 85 96 general features 361 general setup 82 getting help 65 Gigabit ports 35 GMT Greenwich Mean Time 83 GVRP 96 103 104 and port assignment 104 GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol 96 H hardware installation 29 hardware monitor 80 hardware overview 33 hello time 142 hops 142 HTTPS 322 certificates 322 implementation 322 public keys private keys 322 HTTPS example 323 humidity 357 IEEE 802 1p priority 86 IEEE 802 1x activate 168 169 225 reauthentication 169 IEEE 802 1x port authentication 165 IGMP version 205 IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol 205 IGMP filtering 205 profile 212 profiles 207 IGMP leave timeout fast 209 mormal 208 IGMP snooping 206 and VLANs 206 MVR 213 setup 210 IGMP throttling 209 ingress port 113 ingress rate and bandwidth control 148 installation desktop 29 precautions 30 rack mounting 30 transceivers 36 installation scenarios 29 introduction 23 IP capability 362 services 362 IP address 89 IP interface 87 IP setup 87 IP source guard 235 ARP inspection 235 238 DHCP snooping 235 236 static bindings 235 IP subnet mask 89 L L2PT 269 access port 270 CDP 269 configuration 271 encapsulation 269 LACP 269 MAC address 269 mode 270 overview 269 PAgP 269 point to point 269 STP 269 tunnel port 270 UDLD 269 VTP 269 LACP 155 272 system priority 162 timeout 162 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Index layer
60. IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt VLAN Figure 129 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure DH Snooping VLAN Configure Configure Contigure Show VLAN Start VID End VID Apply VID Enabled Option82 Information i No Ci C Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 79 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Enabled Select Yes to enable DHCP snooping on the VLAN You still have to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch and specify trusted ports Note If DHCP is enabled and there are no trusted ports DHCP requests will not succeed Option82 Select this to have the Switch add the slot number port number and VLAN ID to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 26 5 on page 246 Information Select this to have the Switch add the system n
61. Logins Service Access Control Remote Management Click Here Click Here Click Here Click Here MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 34 Access Control 34 3 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol used to manage and monitor TCP IP based devices SNMP is used to exchange management information between the network management system NMS and a network element NE A manager station can manage and monitor the Switch through the network via SNMP version one SNMPv1 SNMP version 2c or SNMP version 3 The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured Figure 170 SNMP Management Model Manager is Agent Agent Agent Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed switch the Switch An agent translates the local management information from the managed switch into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a switch Examples of variables include number of packets received node port status and so on A
62. MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how long the binding is valid Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator VLAN This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 75 IP Source Guard Static Binding continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 26 4 DHCP Snooping Use this screen to look at various statistics about the DHCP snooping database To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping Figure 126 DHCP Snooping OWS J Configure IPSG Database Status Description Status Agent URL Wirite delay timer 300 seconds Abort timer 300 seconds Agent running None Delay timer expiry Not Running Abort timer expiry Not Running Last succeeded time None Last failed time None Last failed reason No failure recorded Times Total attempts 0 Startup failures 0 Successful transfers Failed transfers Successful reads Failed reads Successful writes Fai
63. MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 5 The Web Configurator 5 Wait for the Starting XMODEM upload message before activating XMODEM upload on your terminal 6 After a configuration file upload type atgo to restart the Switch Figure 35 Resetting the Switch Via the Console Port ootbase Version V0 4 12 13 2007 01 35 53 RAM Size 65536 Kbytes DRAM POST Testing 65536K OK FLASH AMD 64M 1 CACHE WB 266Mhz brcmConf e3800000 I ON D ON ZyNOS Version V3 90 BBA 0 b0 09 03 2008 17 16 26 Press any key to enter debug mode within 3 seconds Enter Debug Mode ras atlc Starting XMODEM upload CRC mode CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Total 393216 bytes received Erasing ras atgo The Switch is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default password of 1234 5 7 Logging Out of the Web Configurator Click Logout in a screen to exit the web configurator You have to log in with your password again after you log out This is recommended after you finish a management session for security reasons Figure 36 Web Configurator Logout Screen Thank you for using the Web Configurator Goodbye MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 5 The Web Configurator 5 8 Help The web configurator s online help has descriptions of individual screens and some supplementary information Click the Help link from a web configurator screen
64. MSTP 144 port 73 port details 75 power 81 STP 135 139 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Index VLAN 99 STP 125 272 361 bridge ID 135 139 bridge priority 134 138 configuration 133 137 designated bridge 126 forwarding delay 134 138 Hello BPDU 126 Hello Time 134 135 138 140 how it works 126 Max Age 134 136 138 140 path cost 126 134 138 port priority 134 138 port state 127 root port 126 status 135 139 terminology 125 vs loop guard 261 subnet based VLAN 106 and DHCP VLAN 106 priority 106 setup 105 subnet based VLANs 104 switch lockout 62 switch reset 63 switch setup 85 switching 361 syntax conventions 5 SYS LED 43 syslog 239 331 protocol 331 server setup 333 settings 332 setup 332 severity levels 331 system information 80 system log 330 system reboot 299 T TACACS 221 222 setup 225 TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus 221 Tag Protocol Identifier see TPID tagged VLAN 95 temperature 357 temperature indicator 80 terminal emulation 35 time current 83 time zone 83 Time RFC 868 83 time server 83 time service protocol 83 format 83 TPID 199 trademarks 371 transceiver MultiSource Agreement MSA 36 transceivers 36 installation 36 removal 37 traps destination 316 TRTCM and bandwidth control 284 and DiffServ 284 color aware mode 282 color blind mode 281 setup 284 trunk group 155 trunking 155 361 example 162 trusted ports ARP inspection 23
65. Overview The MAC Table screen a MAC table is also known as a filtering database shows how frames are forwarded or filtered across the Switch s ports It shows what device MAC address belonging to what VLAN group if any is forwarded to which port s and whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen The Switch uses the MAC table to determine how to forward frames See the following figure The Switch examines a received frame and learns the port on which this source MAC address came The Switch checks to see if the frame s destination MAC address matches a source MAC address already learned in the MAC table f the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address then it forwards the frame to that port f the Switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address then the frame is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 38 MAC Table f the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the frame Figure 191 MAC Table Flowchart Is destination MAC address in the MAC Table Yes Forward to all ports Is the outgoing port different from the incoming port Filter this frame 38 2 Viewing the MAC Table Forward to outgoing
66. Port Statistics The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 6 Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This identifies the Ethernet port Click a port number to display the Port Details screen refer to Figure 41 on page 75 Name This is the name you assigned to this port in the Basic Setting gt Port Setup screen Link This field displays the speed either 10M for 10Mbps 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for 1000Mbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for half It also shows the cable type Copper or Fiber for the combo ports State If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 13 1 on page 125 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This fields displays whether LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled on the port TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours minutes and seconds the port has been up Clear Counter Enter a port num
67. Second Sunday March and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday March and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 9 Basic Setting gt General Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday November and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday October and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click App
68. Section 34 3 on page 306 Cluster Management Cluster Management allows you to manage multiple switches through one switch called the cluster manager See Chapter 37 on page 335 1 3 Good Habits for Managing the Switch Do the following things regularly to make the Switch more secure and to manage the Switch more effectively Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch Write down the password and put it in a safe place Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the Switch to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the Switch You could simply restore your last configuration MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Hardware Installation and Connection This chapter shows you how to install and connect the Switch 2 1 Installation Scenarios The Switch can be placed on a desktop or rack mounted on a standard EIA rack Use the rubber feet in a desktop installation and the brackets in a rack mounted installation
69. Source label This port s attributes are Destination copied Port Enter the destination port or ports under the Destination label These are the ports which are going to have the same attributes as the source port You can enter individual ports separated by a comma or a range of ports by using a dash Example e 2 4 6 indicates that ports 2 4 and 6 are the destination ports 2 6 indicates that ports 2 through 6 are the destination ports Basic Select which port settings you configured in the Basic Setting menus Setting should be copied to the destination port s Advanced Select which port settings you configured in the Advanced Application Application menus should be copied to the destination ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide PART VI Troubleshootinc Specifications amp Troubleshooting 353 Product Specifications 357 Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories Power Hardware Connections and LEDs Switch Access and Login Switch Config
70. T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Active Criteria O src dst mac j src dst mac src dst mac Goi pega S za Group None None None None None None None None O DW NA ON Siw N None A4 a None zm None a M None JUHSHHSUHHS Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Link This is the only screen you need to configure to enable static link Aggregation aggregation Setting Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Active Select this option to activate a trunk group MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation Table 39 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Criteria Select the outgoing traffic distribution type Packets from the same source and or to the same destination are sent over the same link within the trunk By default the Switch uses the src dst mac distribution type If the Switch is behind a router the packet s destination or source MAC address will be changed In this case set the Switch to distribute traffic based on its P address to make sure port trunking can work properly Select src mac to distribute traf
71. T6 OER nnn Link Aggregation Setting ized Group Enabled Synchronized Aggregator ID Criteria Status ID Ports Ports 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 T1 3 6 K l Jet i src dstmac LACP 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 src dst ip Static src dst mac src dst mac src dst mac src dst mac The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Group ID This field displays the group ID to identify a trunk group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Enabled These are the ports you have configured in the Link Aggregation screen Ports to be in the trunk group The port number s displays only when this trunk group is activated and there is a port belonging to this group Synchronized These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link Ports in this trunk group Aggregator Link Aggregator ID consists of the following system priority MAC ID address key port priority and port number Refer to Section 17 2 1 on page 156 for more information on this field The ID displays only when there is a port belonging to this trunk group and LACP is also enabled for this group MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 157 Chapter 17 Link Aggregation Table 38 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Criteria This
72. UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Appendix A Common Services 370 Table 128 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2008 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or
73. VID Delete Default Gateway MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 6 Initial Setup Example MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide System Status and Port Statistics This chapter describes the system status web configurator home page and port details screens 7 1 Overview The home screen of the web configurator displays a port statistical summary with links to each port showing statistical details 7 2 Port Status Summary To view the port statistics click Status in all web configurator screens to display the Status screen as shown next Figure 40 Status LEUD Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 g Down STOP Disabled 0 0 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 6 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 n Down STOP Disabled 0 0 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 11 100M F Copper FORWARDING Disabled 5106 11532 12 100M F Copper FORWARDING Disabled 12565 6936 An T Clear Counter C Port Errors e Ce 0o0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Tx KB s 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 5 3 Rx KB s 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 872 Up Time 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 1 15 50 1 15 50 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 73 Chapter 7 System Status and
74. You must first allow 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication Table 41 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x continued LABEL DESCRIPTION on on Timer Reauthenticati Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re enter his or her username Reauthenticati Specify how often a client has to re enter his or her username and and password to stay connected to the port password to stay connected to the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 18 2 2 Activate MAC Authentication Use this screen to activate MAC authentication In the Port Authentication screen click MAC Authentication to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 91 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication OME Port Authentication Active C Name Prefix Password zyxel Timeout 0 Port Active O 1 Ci 2 A 3 1 4 E 5 0 6 rH 7 C 8 ri g C 10 0 11 D 12 C Apply Cancel MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication
75. You can change transceivers while the Switch is operating You can use different transceivers to connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber optic or even copper cable connectors To avoid possible eye injury do not look into an operating fiber optic module s connectors Type SFP connection interface Connection speed 1 Gigabit per second Gbps 3 1 3 1 Transceiver Installation Use the following steps to install a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module Insert the transceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 The Switch automatically detects the installed transceiver Check the LEDs to verify that it is functioning properly 4 Close the transceiver s latch latch styles vary 5 Connect the fiber optic cables to the transceiver Figure 10 Transceiver Installation Example Figure 11 Connecting the Fiber Optic Cables eS s IE 3 1 3 2 Transceiver Removal Use the following steps to remove a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Remove the fiber optic cables from the transceiver 2 Open the transceiver s latch latch styles vary MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 Pull the transceiver out of the slot Figure 12 Removing the Fiber Optic Cables ile Figure 13 Opening the Transcei
76. and the Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted ports in the following situations The packet is a DHCP server packet for example OFFER ACK or NACK The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the current bindings The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet and the source Pd address and source port do not match any of the current indings The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high Rate pps Specify the maximum number for DHCP packets 1 2048 that the Switch receives from each port each second The Switch discards any additional DHCP packets Enter 0 to disable this limit which is recommended for trusted ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 26 5 2 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN and to specify whether or not the Switch adds DHCP relay agent option 82 information Chapter 32 on page 287 to DHCP requests that the Switch relays to a DHCP server for each VLAN To MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard open this screen click Advanced Application gt
77. capable of detecting and reporting if the voltage falls out of the tolerance range Current This is the current voltage reading MAX This field displays the maximum voltage measured at this point MIN This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point Threshold This field displays the percentage tolerance of the voltage with which the Switch still works Status Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point otherwise Error is displayed MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 8 3 General Setup Use this screen to configure general settings such as the system name and time Click Basic Setting gt General Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 43 Basic Setting gt General Setup DIECAN System Name Location Contact Person s Name Use Time Server when Bootup Time Server IP Address 4j o Current Time toe l po e 3 New Time hh mm ss qul 5 Current Date New Date yyyy mm dd 1970 g lr Time Zone UTC Daylight Saving Time 1 Start Date F unda of Januan at End Date Fs Sunday E of Janay E at ooo E It will take 60 seconds if time server is unreachable Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 9 Basic Setting gt General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Sys
78. configuring this screen afresh MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 10 Create an IP based VLAN Example This example shows you how to create an IP VLAN which includes ports 1 4 and 8 Follow these steps 1 Activate this protocol based VLAN 2 Type the port number you want to include in this protocol based VLAN Type 1 3 Give this protocol based VLAN a descriptive name Type I P VLAN 4 Select the protocol Leave the default value I P 5 Type the VLAN ID of an existing VLAN In our example we already created a static VLAN with an ID of 5 Type 5 6 Leave the priority set to O and click Add Figure 57 Protocol Based VLAN Configuration Example D Protocol Based VLAN NND Vlan Port Setting Active iv Port H Name PLAN ole i Ethernet type a o Hey VID b Priority joz Ada Cancel index Active Port Name Ethernet type VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel To add more ports to this protocol based VLAN 1 Click the index number of the protocol based VLAN entry Click 1 2 Change the value in the Port field to the next port you want to add 3 Click Add MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 11 Port based VLAN Setup Port based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC address and its associated port Port based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for each port Therefore if you wish to
79. dana 354 dha SWEN COnN UNIO us ccn us cie do casei nadar bur da cu na dart dan 356 Chapter 42 Ris ec V YA Q 357 Part VII Appendices and Index 365 Appendix A COBIREITSSIVIBRR did n n gi Rb dud HRIRI IIS RIED A ER xc RU LH METRICS oe A 367 Appendiz B Legal Or EON TOTIS 371 375 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide ART Introduction and Getting to Know Your Switch 23 Hardware Installation and Connection Hardware Overview 33 Tutorials 45 Getting to Know Your Switch This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the Switch 1 1 Introduction The MGS 3712 and MGS 3712F are layer 2 stand alone Gigabit Ethernet GbE switches The MGS 3712 has four GbE dual personality interfaces with each interface comprising one mini GBIC slot and one 100 1000 Mbps RJ 45 port with either port or slot active at a time In addition the MGS 3712 has 8 100 1000 Mbps RJ 45 ports The MGS 3712F also has four GbE dual personality interfaces with each interface comprising one mini GBIC slot and one 100 1000 Mbps RJ 45 port with either port or slot active at a time In addition the MGS 3712F has 8 mini GBIC slots With its built in web configurator managing and configuring the Switch is easy In addition the Sw
80. different traffic queues By default the weight for QO is 1 for Q1 is 2 for Q2 is 3 and so on Guaranteed quantum is calculated as Queue Weight x 2048 bytes MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 22 Queuing Method 22 1 3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle A queue is a given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the incoming traffic on that port This queue then moves to the back of the list The next queue is given an equal amount of bandwidth and then moves to the end of the list and so on depending on the number of queues being used This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR uses the same algorithm as round robin scheduling but services queues based on their priority and queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field rather than a fixed amount of bandwidth WRR is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues and returns to queues that have not yet emptied MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 22 Queuing Method 22 2 Configuring Queuing Click Advanced Application gt Queuing Method in the navi
81. domain of the client computers or else the client computers must be configured manually DHCP Modes If there is already a DHCP server on your network then you can configure the Switch as a DHCP relay agent When the Switch receives a request from a computer on your network it contacts the DHCP server for the necessary IP information and then relays the assigned information back to the computer DHCP Configuration Options The DHCP configuration on the Switch is divided into Global and VLAN screens The screen you should use for configuration depends on the DHCP services you want to offer the DHCP clients on your network Choose the configuration screen based on the following criteria Global The Switch forwards all DHCP requests to the same DHCP server VLAN The Switch is configured on a VLAN by VLAN basis The Switch can be configured to relay DHCP requests to different DHCP servers for clients in different VLAN MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 287 Chapter 32 DHCP 32 2 DHCP Status Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel The DHCP Status screen displays Figure 156 IP Application gt DHCP Status ED DHCP Status Global VLAN Relay Status Relay Mode None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 95 IP Application gt DHCP LABEL DESCRIPTION Relay Mode This field displays e None if the Switch is not configured as a DHCP relay agent G
82. example displays two VLANs VIDs 1 and 2 for a campus network Two DHCP servers are installed to serve each VLAN The system is set up to forward DHCP requests from the dormitory rooms VLAN 1 to the DHCP server MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 32 DHCP with an IP address of 192 168 1 100 Requests from the academic buildings VLAN 2 are sent to the other DHCP server with an IP address of 172 23 10 100 Figure 161 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs Po att tITM b DHCP 192 168 1 100 E DHCP 172 23 10 100 Tj For the example network configure the VLAN Setting screen as shown Figure 162 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs Configuration Example OXKERESUT oD VID Remote DHCP Server 1 Remote DHCP Server 2 Remote DHCP Server 3 Relay Agent Information Information VID Type Relay E E Option 82 M MGS 3712 Add Cancel Clear DHCP Status Delete 192 168 1 100 ri Delete Cancel Status MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 32 DHCP MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide PART V Management Maintenance 297 Access Control 305 Diagnostic 329 Syslog 331 Cluster Management 335 MAC Table 343 ARP Table 347 Configure Clone 349 Maintenance This chapter explains how to configure the screens that let you maintain the firmware and configuration files 33 1 The Maintenance Screen Use this screen to manage firmware and your conf
83. field displays the port number i Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this checkbox to permit MAC authentication on this port You must first allow MAC authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide m Port Security This chapter shows you how to set up port security 19 1 About Port Security Port security allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch The Switch can learn up to 16K MAC addresses in total with no limit on individual ports other than the sum cannot exceed 16K For maximum port security enable this feature disable MAC address learning and configure static MAC address es for a port It is not recommended you disable port security together with MAC address learning as this will result in many broadcasts By default MAC address learning is still en
84. field shows the number of packets with VLAN tags transmitted Rx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received RX Packet This field shows the number of good packets unicast multicast and broadcast received Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets received Broadcas t This field shows the number of good broadcast packets received Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets received Control This field shows the number of control packets received including those with CRC error but it does not include the 802 3x Pause packets TX Collision The following fields display information on collisions while transmitting Single This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Multiple This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission was inhibited by more than one collision Excessiv e This is a count of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset Late This is the number of times a late collision is detected that is after 512 bits of the packets have already been transmitted MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics T
85. following table describes the labels in this screen Table 80 ARP Inspection Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Total number of filters This field displays the current number of MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified unauthorized ARP packets Index This field displays a sequential number for each MAC address filter Mac Address This field displays the source MAC address in the MAC address filter VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the MAC address filter Port This field displays the source port of the discarded ARP packet Expiry sec This field displays how long in seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch You can also delete the record manually Delete MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 251 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 80 ARP Inspection Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Reason This field displays the reason the ARP packet was discarded MAC VLAN The MAC address and VLAN ID were not in the binding table IP The MAC address and VLAN ID were in the binding table but the IP address was not valid Port The MAC address VLAN ID and IP address were in the binding table but the port number was not valid Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above 26 6 1 ARP Inspection VLAN Status Use this screen to look at various statistics about A
86. groups that clients connected to the Switch are able to join A profile contains a range of multicast IP addresses which you want clients to be able to join Profiles are assigned to ports in the Multicast Setting screen Clients connected to those ports are then able to join the multicast groups specified in the profile Each port can be assigned a single profile A profile can be assigned to multiple ports Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt I GMP Filtering Profile link to display the screen as shown Figure 108 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile IGMP Filtering Profile Multicast Setting Profile Setup Profile Name Start Address End Address 224 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 Add Clear Profile Name Start Address End Address Delete Profile Delete Rule Default r1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 62 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes To configure additional rule s for a profile that you have already added enter the profile name and specify a different IP multicast address range Start Address Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast P addresses that you want to belong to the IG
87. in the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames that the Switch relays to a DHCP server Relay Agent I nformation can include the System Name of the Switch if you select this option You can change the System Name in Basic Settings gt General Setup The following describes the DHCP relay information that the Switch sends to the DHCP server Table 96 Relay Agent Information FIELD LABELS DESCRIPTION Slot ID 1 byte This value is always 0 for stand alone switches Port ID 1 byte This is the port that the DHCP client is connected to VLAN ID 2 bytes This is the VLAN that the port belongs to Information up to 64 bytes This optional read only field is set according to system name set in Basic Settings gt General Setup Configuring DHCP Global Relay Configure global DHCP relay in the DHCP Relay screen Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel and click the Global link to display the screen as shown Figure 157 P Application gt DHCP gt Global Oi ora Status Active C Remote DHCP Server 1 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information O Option 82 Information F MGS 3712 Apply Cancel MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 32 DHCP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 97 IP Application gt DHCP gt Global LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to en
88. in this screen Table 66 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Server Use this section to configure your RADIUS authentication settings Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple RADIUS servers Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured RADIUS server if the RADIUS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second RADIUS server Select round robin to alternate between the RADIUS servers that it sends authentication requests to Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the RADIUS server If you are using index priority for your authentication and you are using two RADIUS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two RADIUS servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a response from the first RADIUS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second RADIUS server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alph
89. logs that the device can generate Select this option to set the device to generate logs for the corresponding category Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 36 Syslog 36 3 Syslog Server Setup Click Management gt Syslog gt Syslog Server Setup to view the screen as shown next Use this screen to configure a list of external syslog servers Figure 185 Management gt Syslog gt Syslog Server Setup e Syslog Server Setup Syslog Setup Active 1 Server Address 0 0 0 0 Log Level Level 0 Add Cancel Clear Index Active IP Address Log Level Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 116 Management gt Syslog gt Syslog Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to have the device send logs to this syslog server Clear the check box if you want to create a syslog server entry but not have the device send logs to it you c
90. on the System Switch Click Config 2 to reboot the system and load Configuration 2 on the Switch Note Make sure to click the Save button in any screen to save your settings to the current configuration on the Switch Load Factory Default Follow the steps below to reset the Switch back to the factory defaults In the Maintenance screen click the Click Here button next to Load Factory Default to clear all Switch configuration information you configured and return to the factory defaults Click OK to reset all Switch configurations to the factory defaults Figure 164 Load Factory Default Start Microsoft Internet Explorer 32 Are you sure you want to load Factory default In the web configurator click the Save button in the top of the screen to make the changes take effect If you want to access the Switch web configurator again you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Switch IP address 192 168 1 1 33 3 Save Configuration Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings permanently to Configuration 1 on the Switch MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 33 Maintenance Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch Alternatively click Save on the top right hand corner in any screen to save the configuration changes to the current configuration Note Clicking the Apply o
91. randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result back to the server The client automatically saves any new server public keys In subsequent connections the server public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer 2 Encryption Method Once the identification is verified both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption method to use MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 321 Chapter 34 Access Control Authentication and Data Transmission After the identification is verified and data encryption activated a secure tunnel is established between the client and the server The client then sends its authentication information user name and password to the server to log in to the server 34 6 SSH Implementation on the Switch 34 6 1 Your Switch supports SSH version 2 using RSA authentication and three encryption methods DES 3DES and Blowfish The SSH server is implemented on the Switch for remote management and file transfer on port 22 Only one SSH connection is allowed at a time Requirements for Using SSH You must install an SSH client program on a client computer Windows or Linux operating system that is used to connect to the Switch over SSH 34 7 Introduction to HTTPS HTTPS HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer or HTTP over SSL is a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts web pages Secure Socket Layer SSL is an applica
92. save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields back to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 21 3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Policy screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the I ndex field Figure 98 Advanced Application Policy Rule Summary Table Index Active Name Classifier s Delete 1 Yes Test Example C Delete Cancel MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the policy index number Click an index number to edit the policy Active This field displays Yes when policy is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the name you have assigned to this policy Classifier s This field displays the name s of the classifier to which this policy applies Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Can
93. shows the outgoing traffic distribution algorithm used in this trunk group Packets from the same source and or to the same destination are sent over the same link within the trunk src mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s source MAC address dst mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s destination MAC address src dst mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination MAC addresses src ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s source IP address dst ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s destination IP address src dst ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination IP addresses Status This field displays how these ports were added to the trunk group It displays Static if the ports are configured as static members of a trunk group e LACP if the ports are configured to join a trunk group via LACP MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 17 4 Link Aggregation Setting Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting to display the screen shown next See Section 17 1 on page 155 for more information on link aggregation Figure 83 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting C QUES Ee Status LACP Group ID
94. so on e e g is a shorthand for for instance and i e means that is or in other words MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 5 Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The Switch icon is not an exact representation of your device The Switch Computer Notebook computer Server ill Telephone NS us MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Safety Warnings Safety Warnings Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information For continued protection against risk of fire replace only with same type and rating of fuse Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servici
95. that is a port through which a data packet enters If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the ingress port for both ports The numbers in the top row denote the incoming port for the corresponding port listed on the left its outgoing port CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 113 Chapter 9 VLAN Table 20 Port Based VLAN Setup continued label Description Outgoing These are the egress ports an egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the egress port for both ports CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Stati
96. timeserver for up to 60 seconds If you select a timeserver that is unreachable then this screen will appear locked for 60 seconds Please wait Current Time This field displays the time you open this menu or refresh the menu New Time hh min ss Enter the new time in hour minute and second format The new time then appears in the Current Time field after you click Apply Current Date This field displays the date you open this menu New Date Enter the new date in year month and day format The new date then yyyy mm dd appears in the Current Date field after you click Apply Time Zone Select the time difference between UTC Universal Time Coordinated formerly known as GMT Greenwich Mean Time and your time zone from the drop down list box Daylight Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many Saving Time countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time is displayed in the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select
97. to go to that cluster member switch s web configurator home page This cluster member web MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 337 Chapter 37 Cluster Management configurator home page and the home page that you d see if you accessed it directly are different Figure 188 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen Status O Logou Basic Setting 2924193 Member id d Advanced Application Routing Protocol Basic Setting Advanced Applications Routing Protocol Management Management System Info VLAN Static Route Setup Diagnosti General Setup Static MAC Forward MAC Table Switch Setup Spanning Tree Protocol ARP Table Maintenance IP Setup Bandwidth Control Port Status Diagnostic Port Setup Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Cluster Management eel eexample N ARP T4 Link Aggregation Port Authentication Port Security Access Control DiffServ Queuing Method 37 2 1 1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch You can use FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member switch through the cluster manager switch as shown in the following example Figure 189 Example Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch C gt ftp 192 168 1 1 Connected to 192 168 1 1 220 Switch FTP version 1 0 ready at Thu Jan 1 00 58 46 1970 User 192 168 0 1 none admin 331 Enter PASS command Password 230 Logged in ftp 1s 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data co
98. to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 23 4 1 Port based Q in Q Port based Q in Q lets the Switch treat all frames received on the same port as the same VLAN flows and add the same outer VLAN tag to them even they have different customer VLAN IDs MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking Click Port based QinQ in the Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking screen to display the screen as shown Figure 103 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Port based QinQ x Port So OWEN EM MN Bi iwini LE zi b d QING VLAN Stacking SPVID Priority p p i Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 57 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Port based QinQ LABEL DESCRIPTION Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring SPVID SPVI D is the service provider s VLAN ID the outer VLAN tag Enter the service provider ID from 1 to 4094 for frames received on this port See Chapter 9 on page 95 for more background information on VLAN ID Priority
99. varies depending on your switch model See Chapter 42 on page 357 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Basic Setting This chapter describes how to configure the System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup and Port Setup screens 8 1 Overview The System Info screen displays general Switch information such as firmware version number and hardware polling information such as fan speeds The General Setup screen allows you to configure general Switch identification information The General Setup screen also allows you to set the system time manually or get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your Switch The real time is then displayed in the Switch logs The Switch Setup screen allows you to set up and configure global Switch features The IP Setup screen allows you to configure a Switch IP address in each routing domain subnet mask s and DNS domain name server for management purposes MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 8 2 System Information In the navigation panel click Basic Setting gt System I nfo to display the screen as shown You can check the firmware version number and monitor the Switch temperature fan speeds and voltage in this screen Figure 42 Basic Setting gt System Info xcu cH System Name MGS 3712 ZyNOS FW Version V3 80 BBA 0 b0 09 03 2
100. with corresponding IP address above Address Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Configure Clone This chapter shows you how you can copy the settings of one port onto other ports 40 1 Configure Clone Cloning allows you to copy the basic and advanced settings from a source port to a destination port or ports Click Management gt Configure Clone to open the following screen Figure 194 Management gt Configure Clone Source Destination Port Port Features Active Name Speed Duplex BPDU Control Flow Control Intrusion Lock VLAN1q VLAN1q Member Bandwidth Control VLAN Stacking Port Security Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Port Authentication Queuing Method IGMP Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Protocol based VLAN Port based VLAN MAC Authentication Two rate three color marker Ethernet OAM Loop Guard ARP Inspection DHCP Snooping VLAN Mapping Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling LLDP Apply Cancel Basic Setting Advanced Application CIELEIEEFCIHEILEIELCEEECI EE Oe Oe oe ao noe EI DI LI MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 40 Configure Clone The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 123 Management gt Configure Clone LABEL DESCRIPTION Source Enter the source port under the
101. your computer to any Ethernet port on the Switch Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the Switch 2 Open your web browser and enter 192 168 1 1 the default IP address in the address bar to access the web configurator See Section 5 2 on page 57 for more information MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 6 Initial Setup Example Click Basic Setting gt IP Setup in the navigation panel Configure the related fields in the I P Setup screen For the VLAN2 network enter 192 168 2 1 as the IP address and 255 255 255 0 as the subnet mask In the VID field enter the ID of the VLAN group to which you want this management IP address to belong This is the same as the VLAN ID you configure in the Static VLAN screen Click Add to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off IP Setup Domain Name Server Default Management in band Management IP Address Out of band Management IP Address band IP Addresses IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Default Gateway Index IP Address 0 0 0 0 in band C Outof band C DHCP Client Static IP Address IP Address 2219811 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Default Gateway foooo VID n j IP Address 216801 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Default Gateway joo Apply Cancel 218821 pooo Add Cancel IP Subnet Mask
102. 0 0x0000 Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Our Bridge 8000 000000000000 2 20 15 0 0x0000 001349000002 0 7523DB32DA2D62 0 0 VLAN 1 4093 Our Bridge 8001 000000000000 0 0x0000 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 32 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click MSTP to edit MSTP settings on the Switch Delay second CST This section describes the Common Spanning Tree settings Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits second a configuration message Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without second receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Cost to Bridge Port ID This is the path cost from the ro
103. 008 Ethernet Address 00 19 cb 00 00 02 Hardware Monitor Temperature unit C Temperature C Current MAX MIN Threshold Status BOARD 47 0 47 0 46 0 85 0 Normal MAC 54 0 54 0 54 0 100 0 Normal PHY 50 0 50 0 49 0 100 0 Normal FAN Speed RPM Current MAX MIN Threshold Status FAN 44 0 0 500 Error FAN2 lt 4 0 0 500 Error Voltage V Current MAX MIN Threshold Status 1 2VIN 1 217 1 217 1 217 1 10 Normal 1 8VIN 1 843 1 843 1 843 1 9 Normal 3 3VIN 3 325 3 325 3 325 1 8 Normal 2 5VIN 2 539 2 539 2 539 1 8 Normal 1 0VIN 1 025 1 025 1 025 1 12 Normal The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 8 Basic Setting gt System Info LABEL DESCRIPTION System This field displays the descriptive name of the Switch for identification Name purposes ZyNOS F W This field displays the version number of the Switch s current firmware Version including the date created Ethernet This field refers to the Ethernet MAC Media Access Control address of the Address Switch Hardware Monitor Temperature The Switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and Unit reporting if the temperature rises above the threshold You may choose the temperature unit Centigrade or Fahrenheit in this field Temperature BOARD MAC and PHY refer to the location of the temperature sensors on the Switch printed circuit board Current This shows the current temperature at this senso
104. 1 1 2 04 58 Static Previous Next The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Search Enter an existing VLAN ID number s separated by a comma and click by VID Search to display only the specified VLAN s in the list below Leave this field blank and click Search to display all VLANs configured on the Switch The Number This is the number of VLANs configured on the Switch of VLAN The Number This is the number of VLANs that match the searching criteria and display of Search in the list below Results ae This field displays only when you use the Search button to look for certain VLANs Index This is the VLAN index number Click on an index number to view more VLAN details VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry or other added in another way such as via Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous next screen if all status information cannot be seen in one screen MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 5 2 VLAN Details Use this
105. 12F User s Guide Chapter 32 DHCP together with the DHCP requests to the DHCP server This allows the DHCP server to assign the appropriate IP address according to the VLAN ID Figure 159 DHCP Relay Configuration Example DHCP Relay g Status Active Vv Remote DHCP Server 1 fi 92 168 1 100 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information Ivi Option 82 Information F MGS 3712 Apply Cancel 32 4 Configuring DHCP VLAN Settings Use this screen to configure your DHCP settings based on the VLAN domain of the DHCP clients Click I P Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel then click the VLAN link In the DHCP Status screen that displays Note You must set up a management IP address for each VLAN that you want to configure DHCP settings for on the Switch See Section 8 6 on page 87 for information on how to set up management IP addresses for VLANs Figure 160 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN ORNETTE Status VID ERES Remote DHCP Server 1 ooo Remote DHCP Server 2 pooo Remote DHCP Server 3 booo Relay Agent Information Option 82 Information M MGS 3712 Add Cancel Clear VID Type DHCP Status Delete Delete Cancel MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 32 DHCP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 98 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION VID Enter th
106. 135 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 28 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP continued Delay second LABEL DESCRIPTION Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without second receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Port ID Topology Changed Times This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MRSTP click MRSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Section 13 1 on page 125 for more information on MRSTP Figure 75 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree P Status Tree Active Bridge Priority Hello Time MAX Age Forwarding Dela
107. 20 VDC 500mA only connect the output pin pair 1 2 to a device in Normal Close NO operation and or pin pair 2 3 to a device in Normal Open NO operation Standard Wire Gauge 20 28 AWG Wire strip length 6 7 mm Table 125 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Default IP Address In band 192 168 1 1 Out of band Management port 192 168 0 1 Default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits Administrator User admin Name Default Password 1234 Number of Login Accounts Configurable on the Switch 4 management accounts configured on the Switch Authentication via RADIUS and TACACS also available Maximum Frame Size 9 K 9216 bytes VLAN A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router MAC Address Filter Filter traffic based on the source and or destination MAC address and VLAN group ID DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Relay Use this feature to have the Switch forward DHCP requests to DHCP servers on your network IGMP Snooping The Switch supports IGMP snooping enabling group multicast traffic to be only forwarded to ports that are mem
108. 275 30 2 Configuring Stalig ROUNE riesenie ranne SSE DU nen ERIuS 276 Chapter 31 uui QO 279 21 9 DITS OE Be 2 iussus aside eade Rae ae dE RE aD Co en meen eter EA UR E DRE 279 21 1 1 D3SUCP and Per Hop BOPBUIBE 5iecucccueues ee tap e die pel r Etc c pat E 279 21 4 2 Dea NOUS Example Simru ttr itle gba ad a debct adc dal ae 280 31 2 Two Rate Three Color Marker Traffic Policing sese 280 SLAI TARTOM Color Dind MONG uisi ene ERE iiare acta tta Eiche alae EBBEN a 281 31 2 2 TRC Or aire Mode orcii annii aaa aa aaa aaia 282 Lee PROUT DISSE sanaa net addi A R 282 31 3 1 Configuring 2 Rate 3 Color Marker Settings 284 214 DSGPAGIEEE 802 Tp Priority Settings aiissaien unie dude t cuti ark tea dada Fade ug 285 31 4 1 Configuring DSCP Senne sisirain Ecce eser std Ea set dua nt e Luces ee aa 286 Chapter 32 287 LM MPILn ES y c NT e 287 dekl DHOF MODOS Rc EE 287 321 2 PICS Dopkqu D OPONSE cp ics tenta tas aa ae a A heed 287 ao ORCE IS dha sites stoi cats ant A En RM anf uu E ute Ret UR IAE 288 NCBI d c 288 323 1 DHCP Relay Agent IRFOFITIALIOIT msrarnaniiis nates Fa bc d FERRE aa tr Ea d a 288 deo Conig ting DHCP Global Relay 52s etidederecii ides tesv tue be ceri ddgenb er vutdab bes quida basada 289 32 3 3 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example iei
109. 5 5 and later or Netscape Navigator 6 and later You can access the command line interface using a terminal emulation program on a computer connected to the Switch console port see Section 3 1 1 on page 35 or access the Switch using Telnet The next part of this guide discusses configuring the Switch using the web configurator MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Tutorials This chapter provides some examples of using the web configurator to set up and use the Switch The tutorials include How to Use DHCP Snooping on the Switch How to Use DHCP Relay on the Switch 4 1 How to Use DHCP Snooping on the Switch You only want DHCP server A connected to port 5 to assign IP addresses to all devices in VLAN network V Create a VLAN containing ports 5 6 and 7 Connect a computer M to the Switch s MGMT port Figure 19 Tutorial DHCP Snooping Tutorial Overview Note For related information about DHCP snooping see Section 26 1 on page 235 The settings in this tutorial are as the following Table 3 Tutorial Settings in this Tutorial PORT DHCP SNOOPING HOST CONNECTED VLAN PVID PORT TRUSTED DHCP Server 5 1 and 100 100 Yes A MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials Table 3 Tutorial Settings in this Tutorial PORT DHCP SNOOPING HOST CONNECTED VLAN PVID PORT TRUSTED DHCP Client 6 1 and 100 100 No B DHCP Client 7 1 and 100 100 N
110. 6 Daisy chaining an External Alarm Sensor to Other Switches of the Same Model ee 11110 een 32 1 S 11 40 3 2 1 See 0 anns 32 1 Pin Assignments 3 2 Rear Panel The following figures show the rear panels of the MGS 3712 and MGS 3712F models The rear panel contains a connector for external backup power supply Figure 17 Rear Panel MGS 3712 12v BPS 888 Figure 18 Rear Panel MGS 3712F MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 3 LEDs After you connect the power to the Switch view the LEDs to ensure proper functioning of the Switch and as an aid in troubleshooting Table 2 LED Descriptions LED cotor S 4TU DESCRIPTION BPS Green On The backup power supply is connected and active Blinking The system is receiving power from the backup power supply Off The backup power supply is not ready or not active PWR Green On The system is turned on Off The system is off SYS Green On The system is on and functioning properly Blinking The system is rebooting and performing self diagnostic tests Off The power is off or the system is not ready malfunctioning ALM Red On A hardware failure is detected or an alarm from the external alarm is received Off The system is functio
111. 68 0 1 If you change this IP address make sure the computer connected to this management port is in the same subnet before accessing the Switch Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 0 254 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 11 Basic Setting gt IP Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION In band IP Addresses You can create up to 64 IP addresses which are used to access and manage the Switch from the ports belonging to the pre defined VLAN s You must configure a VLAN first IP Address Enter the IP address for managing the Switch by the members of the VLAN specified in the VID field below IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation VID Type the VLAN group identification number Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation Add Click Add to i
112. 7 modes 287 relay agent 287 relay example 292 setup 291 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 287 DHCP relay 49 DHCP relay option 82 237 DHCP snooping 45 235 236 configuring 237 DHCP relay option 82 237 trusted ports 236 untrusted ports 236 DHCP snooping database 236 diagnostics 329 Ethernet port test 330 ping 330 system log 330 Differentiated Service DiffServ 279 DiffServ activate 282 and TRTCM 284 DS field 279 DSCP 279 DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping 285 network example 280 PHB 280 dimensions 357 disclaimer 371 double tagged frames 197 DS Differentiated Services 279 DSCP DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping 285 service level 279 what it does 280 DSCP DiffServ Code Point 279 dynamic link aggregation 155 E egress port 114 egress rate and bandwidth control 149 Ethernet broadcast address 347 Ethernet port test 330 external authentication server 222 F fan speed 81 FCC interference statement 371 file transfer using FTP command example 302 filename convention configuration configuration file names 301 filtering 123 rules 123 filtering database MAC table 343 firmware 80 upgrade 299 338 flow control 92 back pressure 92 IEEE802 3x 92 forwarding delay 142 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Index frames tagged 104 untagged 104 front panel 33 FTP 301 file transfer procedure 302 restrictions over WAN 303 G GARP 96 GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol 96
113. 9 DHCP snooping 236 tunnel protocol attribute and RADIUS 231 tutorials 45 DHCP relay 49 DHCP snooping 45 Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM 281 Type of Service ToS 279 U UDLD 272 UniDirectional Link Detection see UDLD untrusted ports ARP inspection 239 DHCP snooping 236 user profiles 222 V Vendor Specific Attribute See VSA ventilation 29 ventilation holes 30 VID 95 99 100 199 number of possible VIDs 95 priority frame 95 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Index VID VLAN Identifier 95 VLAN 84 361 acceptable frame type 104 automatic registration 96 ID 95 IGMP snooping 206 ingress filtering 104 introduction 84 number of VLANs 99 port number 100 port settings 103 port based VLAN 111 port based all connected 113 port based isolation 113 port based wizard 113 PVID 104 static VLAN 100 status 99 100 subnet based 104 trunking 97 104 type 85 98 VLAN Virtual Local Area Network 84 VLAN ID 89 VLAN mapping 265 activating 266 configuration 267 example 265 overview 265 priority level 265 tagged 265 traffic flow 265 untagged 265 VLAN ID 265 VLAN stacking 197 configuration 200 example 197 port roles 198 201 port based Q in Q 201 priority 199 selective Q in Q 202 TPID 199 Tunnel TPID 199 VLAN tag format 199 VLAN tag format 199 VLAN Trunking Protocol see VTP VLAN protocol based See protocol based VLAN 107 VSA 230 VT100 35 VTP 272 W warranty 373
114. Active This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled Yes or disabled No Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 5 4 Configure VLAN Port Settings Use the VLAN Port Setting screen to configure the static VLAN IEEE 802 1Q settings on a port See Section 9 1 on page 95 for more information on static VLAN Click the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen Figure 52 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting c OMELET Ss Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vian VLAN Status GVRP O Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation r I m All 1 ft J o All x 2 O E O All x m 3 5 o nmn All ri 4 r Xj All O n 5 D ee LH All 7 m 8 E E 1 LH All m 7 B DD 3 All O n 8 t m All 7 9 O Lr 1 2 All E n n 10 o it 1 n All T n 11 Eo mJ All O 12 E Jj 6 All O o Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 17 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the netwo
115. CP Relay RFC 3164 Syslog RFC 3376 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 3 RFC 3414 User based Security Model USM for version 3 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP v3 RFC 3580 RADIUS Tunnel Protocol Attribute IEEE 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP IEEE 802 1ag Connectivity Fault Management CFM IEEE 802 1x Port Based Network Access Control IEEE 802 1D MAC Bridges IEEE 802 1p Traffic Types Packet Priority IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 3 Packet Format IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 42 Product Specifications Table 127 Standards Supported continued STANDARD DESCRIPTION IEEE 802 3ah Ethernet OAM Operations Administration and Maintenance IEEE 802 3x Flow Control Safety UL 60950 1 CSA 60950 1 EN 60950 1 IEC 60950 1 EMC FCC Part 15 Class A CE EMC Class A MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide PART VII Appendices and Index Common Services The following table lists some commonly used services and their associated protocols and port numbers For a comprehensive list of port numbers ICMP type code numbers and services visit the IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority web site Name This is a short descriptive name for the service You can use this one or create a different one if you l
116. Configuring SNMP Click Management gt Access Control gt SNMP to view the screen as shown Use this screen to configure your SNMP settings Figure 171 Management Access Control SNMP General Setting xi m Version Get Community Set Community Trap Community Access Control Trap Group vec public public public Trap Destination Version User Information Index 1 Username p EN m m IP Port booo 162 Username Security Level Authentication admin noauth MD5 j Privacy DES 7 Apply Cancel MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 34 Access Control The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 108 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION General Setting Use this section to specify the SNMP version and community password values Version Select the SNMP version for the Switch The SNMP version on the Switch must match the version on the SNMP manager Choose SNMP version 2c v2c SNMP version 3 w3 or both v3v2c Note SNMP version 2c is backwards compatible with SNMP version 1 Get Community Set Community Enter the Get Community string which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station The Get Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Enter the Set Community which is the password
117. DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 279 Chapter 31 Differentiated Services 31 1 2 The DSCP value determines the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets as it is forwarded across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies DiffServ Network Example The following figure depicts a DiffServ network consisting of a group of directly connected DiffServ compliant network devices The boundary node A in Figure 150 in a DiffServ network classifies marks with a DSCP value the incoming packets into different traffic flows Platinum Gold Silver Bronze based on the configured marking rules A network administrator can then apply various traffic policies to the traffic flows An example traffic policy is to give higher drop precedence to one traffic flow over others In our example packets in the Bronze traffic flow are more likely to be dropped when congestion occurs than the packets in the Platinum traffic flow as they move across the DiffServ network iN N arises Figure 150 DiffServ Network P Platinum G Gold S Silver B B Bronze 31 2 Two Ra
118. DUs enter an MST region external path cost of paths outside this region is increased by one Internal path cost of paths within this region is increased by one when BPDUs traverse the region MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Devices that belong to the same MST region are configured to have the same MSTP configuration identification settings These include the following parameters Name of the MST region Revision level as the unique number for the MST region e VLAN to MST Instance mapping 13 1 5 3 MST Instance An MST Instance MSTI is a spanning tree instance VLANs can be configured to run on a specific MSTI Each created MSTI is identified by a unique number known as an MST ID known internally to a region Thus an MSTI does not span across MST regions The following figure shows an example where there are two MST regions Regions 1 and 2 have 2 spanning tree instances Figure 69 MSTIs in Different Regions Physical Connection MSTI 2 13 1 5 4 Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST A CIST represents the connectivity of the entire network and it is equivalent to a spanning tree in an STP RSTP The CIST is the default MST instance MSTID 0 Any VLANs that are not members of an MST instance are members of the CIST In an MSTP enabled network there is only one CIST that runs between MST regions MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol
119. Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Selective QinQ LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this rule Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring CVID Enter a customer VLAN ID the inner VLAN tag from 1 to 4094 This is the VLAN tag carried in the packets from the subscribers SPVID SPVID is the service provider s VLAN ID the outer VLAN tag Enter the service provider ID from 1 to 4094 for frames received on this port See Chapter 9 on page 95 for more background information on VLAN ID Priority Select a priority level from O to 7 This is the service provider s priority level that adds to the frames received on this port 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest Add Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking Table 58 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Selective Qi
120. EL DESCRIPTION Burst interval seconds The burst interval is the length of time over which the rate of ARP packets is monitored for each port For example if the Rate is 15 pps and the burst interval is 1 second then the Switch accepts a maximum of 15 ARP packets in every one second interval If the burst interval is 5 seconds then the Switch accepts a maximum of 75 ARP packets in every five second interval Enter the length 1 15 seconds of the burst interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 26 7 2 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on each VLAN and to specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt VLAN Figure 135 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure VID ED ARP Inspection VLAN Configure g Configure VLAN Start VID End VID Apply Enabled Log No None Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 85 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure LABEL DESCRIPT
121. ESCRIPTION Speed Duplex Select the speed and the duplex mode of the Ethernet connection on this port Choices are Auto 10M Half Duplex 10M Full Duplex 100M Half Duplex 100M Full Duplex and 1000M Full Duplex Selecting Auto auto negotiation allows one port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support When auto negotiation is turned on a port on the Switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode If the peer port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature the Switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode When the Switch s auto negotiation is turned off a port uses the pre configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer port are the same in order to connect Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory causing packet discards and frame losses Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port The Switch uses IEEE802 3x flow control in full duplex mode and backpressure flow control in half duplex mode EEE802 3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when
122. F User s Guide 123 Chapter 12 Filtering The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 23 Advanced Application gt Filtering LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Make sure to select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by deselecting this check box Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this rule This is for identification only Action Select Discard source to drop the frames from the source MAC address specified in the MAC field The Switch can still send frames to the MAC address Select Discard destination to drop the frames to the destination MAC address specified in the MAC address The Switch can still receive frames originating from the MAC address Select Discard source and Discard destination to block traffic to from the MAC address specified in the MAC field MAC Type a MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs VID Type the VLAN group identification number Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Cle
123. Front Panel Connections LABEL DESCRIPTION 8 100 1000 Connect these ports to high bandwidth backbone network Ethernet Mbps RJ 45 switches or use them to daisy chain other switches Ports MGS 3712 8 Mini GBIC Use mini GBIC transceivers in these slots for connections to backbone Slots MGS Ethernet switches 3712F Four Dual Each interface has one 1000BASE T RJ 45 port and one Small Form Factor Personality Pluggable SFP slot also called a mini GBIC slot with one port or Interfaces transceiver active at a time e Four 100 1000 Mbps RJ 45 Ports Connect these ports to high bandwidth backbone network Ethernet switches using 1000BASE T compatible Category 5 5e 6 copper cables Four Mini GBIC Slots Use mini GBIC transceivers in these slots for connections to backbone Ethernet switches Console Port The console port is for local configuration of the Switch Management Connect to a computer using an RJ 45 Ethernet cable for local Port configuration of the Switch Signal Slot Connect the signal input pins to signal output terminals on other pieces of equipment Connect the signal output pins to a signal input terminal on another piece of equipment See Chapter 42 on page 357 for details on the pin assignments required MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 1 1 Console Port For local management you can use a computer with terminal emulation sof
124. Group ID VLAN ID Note You must also create a VLAN with the specified VID on the Switch 25 3 Supported RADIUS Attributes Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS attributes are data used to define specific authentication and accounting elements in a user profile which is stored on the RADIUS server This appendix lists the RADIUS attributes supported by the Switch MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 231 Chapter 25 AAA Refer to RFC 2865 for more information about RADIUS attributes used for authentication Refer to RFC 2866 and RFC 2869 for RADIUS attributes used for accounting This section lists the attributes used by authentication and accounting functions on the Switch In cases where the attribute has a specific format associated with it the format is specified 25 3 1 Attributes Used for Authentication The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing authentication 25 3 1 1 Attributes Used for Authenticating Privilege Access User Name The format of the User Name attribute is enab where is the privilege level 1 14 User Password NAS Identifier NAS IP Address 25 3 1 2 Attributes Used to Login Users User Name User Password NAS Identifier NAS P Address 25 3 1 3 Attributes Used by the IEEE 802 1x Authentication User Name NAS Identifier NAS IP Address NAS Port NAS Port Type This value is set to Ethernet 15 o
125. ION VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 85 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply VID Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Enabled Select Yes to enable ARP inspection on the VLAN Select No to disable ARP inspection on the VLAN Log Specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from the VLAN None The Switch does not generate any log messages when it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Deny The Switch generates log messages when it discards an ARP packet from the VLAN Permit The Switch generates log messages when it forwards an ARP packet from the VLAN All The Switch generates log messages every time it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes
126. Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling 269 Filtering 123 Spanning Tree Protocol 125 Bandwidth Control 147 Broadcast Storm Control 151 Mirroring 153 Link Aggregation 155 Port Authentication 165 Port Security 171 Classifier 177 Policy Rule 185 Queuing Method 193 VLAN Stacking 197 Multicast 205 AAA 221 IP Source Guard 235 VLAN The type of screen you see here depends on the VLAN Type you selected in the Switch Setup screen This chapter shows you how to configure 802 1Q tagged and port based VLANs 9 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLANs A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes of TCI Tag Control Information starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be
127. MGS 3712 MGS 3712F MetroGigabit Switch Default Login Details IP Address http 192 168 1 1 http 192 168 0 1 Out of band MGMT port User Name admin Password 1234 Firmware Version 3 90 Edition 1 10 2008 ZyXEL Copyright 2008 www zyxel com 3 ZyXEL Communications Corporation About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the Switch using the web configurator Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get your Switch up and running right away It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access Web Configurator Online Help The embedded Web Help contains descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information Command Reference Guide The Command Reference Guide explains how to use the Command Line Interface CLI and CLI commands to configure the Switch Note It is recommended you use the web configurator to configure the Switch Support Disc Refer to the included CD for support documents Documentation Feedback Send your comments questions or suggestions to techwriters zyxel com tw Thank you The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road Il Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 30099 Taiwan MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 3 About This User s Guide
128. MP filter profile End Address Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile If you want to add a single multicast IP address enter it in both the Start Address and End Address fields MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Table 62 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to save the profile to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile Start Address This field displays the start of the multicast address range End Address This field displays the end of the multicast address range Delete To delete the profile s and all the accompanying rules select the profile s that you want to remove in the Delete Profile column then click the Delete button To delete a rule s from a profile select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete Rule column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete Profile Delete Rule check boxes 24 6 MVR Overview Multica
129. Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 34 Access Control SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Table 102 SNMP Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events 34 3 1 SNMP v3 and Security SNMP v3 enhances security for SNMP management SNMP managers can be required to authenticate with agents before conducting SNMP management sessions Security can be further enhanced by encrypting the SNMP messages sent from the managers Encryption protects the contents of the SNMP messages When the contents of the SNMP messages are encrypted only the intended recipients can read them 34 3 2 Supported MIBs MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor sta
130. ON ATTRIBUTE Ingress Bandwidth vendor Id 890 Assignment Vendor Type 1 Vendor data ingress rate Kbps in decimal format MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Table 69 Supported VSAs Vendor Data or Vendor ID Vendor Type Vendor Data FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE Egress Bandwidth vendor Id 890 Assignment Vendor Type 2 Vendor data egress rate Kbps in decimal format Privilege Vendor ID 890 Assignment Vendor Type 3 shell priv lvlzN 9 CISCO 1 CISCO AVPAIR shell priv lvlzN where N is a privilege level from 0 to 14 Note If you set the privilege level of a login account differently on the RADIUS server s and the Switch the user is assigned a privilege level from the database RADIUS or local the Switch uses first for user authentication 25 2 4 1 Tunnel Protocol Attribute You can configure tunnel protocol attributes on the RADIUS server refer to your RADIUS server documentation to assign a port on the Switch to a VLAN based on IEEE 802 1x authentication The port VLAN settings are fixed and untagged This will also set the port s VID The following table describes the values you need to configure Note that the bolded values in the table are fixed values as defined in RFC 3580 Table 70 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute FUNCTION VLAN Assignment ATTRIBUTE Tunnel Type VLAN 13 Tunnel Medium Typ 802 6 Tunnel Private
131. RIPTION Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them CDP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel CDP Cisco Discovery Protocol packets so that other Cisco devices can be discovered through the service provider s network STP VTP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel STP Spanning Tree Protocol packets so that STP can run properly across the service provider s network and spanning trees can be set up based on bridge information from all local and remote networks Select this option to have the Switch tunnel VTP VLAN Trunking Protocol packets so that all customer switches can use consistent VLAN configuration through the service provider s network Point to Point The Switch supports PAgP Port Aggregation Protocol LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol and UDLD UniDirectional Link Detection tunneling for a point to point topology Both PAgP and UDLD are Cisco s proprietary data link layer protocols PAgP is similar to LACP and used to set up a logical aggregation of Ethernet ports automatically UDLD is to determine the link s physical status and detect a unidirectional link PAGP Select this option to have the Switch send PAgP packets to a peer to automatically negotiate and build a logical port aggregation LACP
132. RP packets in each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection VLAN Status Figure 131 ARP Inspection VLAN Status Show VLAN range C OF Inspection VLAN Status Status Enabled VLAN C Selected VLAN Start vip End VID VID Received Apply Request Reply Forwarded Dropped The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 81 ARP Inspection VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN range Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to look at in the section below Enabled VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs on which ARP inspection is enabled in the section below Selected VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs in a specific range in the section below Then enter the lowest VLAN ID Start VI D and the highest VLAN ID End VID you want to look at Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 81 ARP Inspection VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Received This field displays the total number of ARP packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Request This field displays the total number of ARP Request packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Reply Thi
133. S 3712F This trap is sent when the chableEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 2 RADIUS accounting server can 5 2 2 be reached MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 2 5 2 2 312 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 34 Access Control Table 106 SNMP IP Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION ping pingProbeFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 1 This trap is sent when a single ping probe fails pingTestFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 2 This trap is sent when a ping test consisting of a series of ping probes fails pingTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 3 This trap is sent when a ping test is completed traceroute traceRoutePathChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 1 This trap is sent when path to target has changed from a previously determined path traceRouteTestFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 2 This trap is sent when a traceroute test fails traceRouteTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 3 This trap is sent when a traceroute test is completed MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 34 Access Control Table 107 SNMP Switch Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION stp STPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 This trap is sent when the STP root switch changes MRSTPNewRoot MGS 3712F This trap is sent when the 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 3 MRSTP root switch changes 2 2 1 MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 3 2 2 1 MSTPNewRoot MGS 3712F This trap is s
134. Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 317 Chapter 34 Access Control 34 3 5 Configurin Click Managem as shown Uset g SNMP Trap Group ent gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group to view the screen he Trap Group screen to specify the types of SNMP traps that should be sent to each SNMP manager Figure 172 Ma nagement gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group irap Group g SNMP Setting Trap Destination IP z Type Options System coldstart warmstart fanspeed temperature voltage reset timesync intrusionlock loopguard externalalarm Interface 7 linkup linkdown autonegotiation Idp transceiver ddm AMAA De authentication accounting PEL ping traceroute Switch 7 stp mactable rmon cfn The following ta Table 109 Man ble describes the labels in this screen agement Access Control SNMP Trap Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Trap Destination IP Select one of your configured trap destination IP addresses These are the IP addresses of the SNMP managers You must first configure a trap destination IP address in the SNMP Setting screen Use the rest of the screen to select which traps the Switch sends to that SNMP
135. See RSTP 125 rear panel 42 reboot load configuration 299 reboot system 299 registration product 373 related documentation 3 remote management 327 service 328 trusted computers 328 resetting 63 298 to factory default settings 298 restoring configuration 63 300 RFC 3164 331 Round Robin Scheduling 194 routing protocols 362 RSTP 125 rubber feet 30 S safety certifications 364 safety warnings 7 save configuration 62 298 Secure Shell See SSH security 362 Service access control 326 service port 327 Simple Network Management Protocol see SNMP Small Form factor Pluggable SFP 36 SNMP 306 agent 306 and MIB 306 and security 307 authentication 317 communities 316 management model 306 manager 306 MIB 307 network components 306 object variables 306 protocol operations 307 security 317 setup 315 318 version 3 307 versions supported 306 SNMP traps 308 310 312 314 setup 318 supported 311 Spanning Tree Protocol See STP 125 SPQ Strict Priority Queuing 194 SSH encryption methods 322 how it works 321 implementation 322 SSH Secure Shell 320 SSL Secure Socket Layer 322 standby ports 156 static bindings 235 static link aggregation example 162 static MAC address 115 static MAC forwarding 105 108 115 static multicast address 119 static multicast forwarding 119 static routes 277 static trunking example 162 Static VLAN 100 static VLAN control 102 tagging 102 status 58 73 link aggregation 157
136. Select a priority level from O to 7 This is the service provider s priority level that adds to the frames received on this port 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 23 4 2 Selective Q in Q Selective Q in Q is VLAN based It allows the Switch to add different outer VLAN tags to the incoming frames received on one port according to their inner VLAN tags MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking Note Selective Q in Q rules are only applied to single tagged frames received on the access ports If the incoming frames are untagged or single tagged but received on a tunnel port or cannot match any selective Q in Q rules the Switch applies the port based Q in Q rules to them Click Selective QinQ in the Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking screen to display the screen as shown Figure 104 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Selective QinQ Selective QNA aD VLAN Stacking Active L1 Name Port I CVID E SPVID I Priority a Ad Cancel Index Active Name Port CVID SPVID Priority Delete
137. Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS accounting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS accounting server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 25 2 3 AAA Setup Use this screen to configure authentication authorization and accounting settings on the Switch Click on the AAA Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown Figure 121 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup ED AAA SetuP Authentication E Type Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Privilege Enable local Y x j Login local Y Authorization Type Active Method Exec O radius Dot1x O radius Accounting Update Period p minutes Type Active Broadcast Mode Method Privilege System O DL radius Exec e ri start stop gt radius j Dotlx O M start stop gt radius Command
138. Switch Setup VLAN Type 802 10 C Por Based Bridge Control Protocol Transparency Active m MAC Address Learning Aging Time 300 seconds Join Timer po milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer eoo milliseconds Leave All Timer fioooo milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment level 7 level jez levels 5 gt level4 4 level3 3 level2 1 level joz level 2 z Apply Cancel 3 Click Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN 4 Inthe Static VLAN screen select ACTIVE enter a descriptive name VALN 102 for example in the Name field and enter 102 in the VLAN Group ID field 5 Select Fixed to configure port 2 to be a permanent member of this VLAN 6 Clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide st Chapter 4 Tutorials 7 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off Figure 28 Tutorial Create a Static VLAN Static VLAN ACTIVE Name VLAN Group ID Normal C Fixed Port Control Tagging Normal M Tx Tagging C Forbidden 1 2 C Normal Fixed C Forbidden TxTagaing 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 4 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv Tx Tagging 5 Q al e C Fp dde xi 24 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 25 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 26 Norm
139. The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 63 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable MVR to allow one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Multicast VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID 1 to 4094 of the multicast VLAN 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 with which the Switch replaces the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets belonging to this multicast VLAN Mode Specify the MVR mode on the Switch Choices are Dynamic and Compatible Select Dynamic to send IGMP reports to all MVR source ports in the multicast VLAN Select Compatible to set the Switch not to send IGMP reports Port This field displays the port number on the Switch MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Table 63 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Source Port
140. Uer beo asain Fees ador VISAS 307 Meee eir NIBE fe Em 307 223 2 SNEIPT ODS sinagan surdum Eua dct a kcal six ur uo po dU GLK ai add Eon DO 308 EL CON sci i e t 315 243 5 Gontigurib SNMP Trap GrOUP anie kp i aes aac an hd i nec a de aet 318 EI BCR Gelting Up Login ievoi rS 319 RI cui EP ol e E treme reer A E st pene ret reer eet teers etree tere reer 320 LUE du icr Mem TUTTI I 321 34 6 SSH Implementation pi the Swie isset tria adinekin 322 20 8 1 Paguir mente tor Using GSH isimini anana EE ia eS RR EHI ERE E den 322 S7 ENEMA IOUT EA UN o NR DIETE 322 AS PAT Ui ee a An INS Ge Hep E uda Dep d ddobece tm e bc tim Do cR Ido pberu la iui bcc Did d eTESE 323 34 8 1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages ccccsscccceeessccecceessseceeeeesneeeeeenenseeeeeeneesaes 323 34 8 2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages sssseeeenneeeneeeen 324 RONDE A rcc i er 326 218 Serice Port ACCESS CODO snimi praec va apa Exe onc d oper ad RD a a Dr ge 326 oa T0 Romae Mamgemeni dunni 327 Chapter 35 Co ee ee 329 LCcNMEL Bc Jm ae 329 Chapter 36 c L 0 mer 331 E WR ERE II NEVER Um 331 Saa IPI GETU ace Sccaccnce dic 332 2B DVD SIVE TOUS as uad ancdr Fraga ad Eua kat DO ctia dus Fam pO Rd bd aC UR 333 Chapter 37 Cluster Manage MeNi
141. a for 10 1 1 0 24 The Switch can then be configured to group incoming traffic based on the source IP subnet of incoming frames MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN You configure a subnet based VLAN with priority 6 and VID of 100 for traffic received from IP subnet 172 16 1 0 24 voice services You also have a subnet based VLAN with priority 5 and VID of 200 for traffic received from IP subnet 192 168 1 0 24 video services Lastly you configure VLAN with priority 3 and VID of 300 for traffic received from IP subnet 10 1 1 0 24 data services All untagged incoming frames will be classified based on their source IP subnet and prioritized accordingly That is video services receive the highest priority and data the lowest Figure 53 Subnet Based VLAN Application Example Tagged Frames Internet D J Untagged Frames bh E SEEN nij 10 1 1 0 24 VID 300 9 7 Configuring Subnet Based VLAN Click Subnet Based VLAN in the VLAN Port Setting screen to display the configuration screen as shown MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Note Subnet based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN Figure 54 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN EME Vlan Port Setting Active Ci DHCP Vlan Override ri Active Name IP Mask Bits VID Priority Index Active
142. able 7 Status Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Error Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received that were in error RX CRC This field shows the number of packets received with CRC Cyclic Redundant Check error s Length This field shows the number of packets received with a length that was out of range Runt This field shows the number of packets received that were too short shorter than 64 octets including the ones with CRC errors Distribution 64 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length 65 127 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length 128 255 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length 256 511 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length 512 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received 1023 that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length 1024 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received 1518 that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length Giant This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1519 octets in length and the maximum frame size The maximum frame size
143. able DHCP relay Remote DHCP Server 1 3 Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation Relay Agent Information Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot number port number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information Apply This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup screen Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 32 3 3 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example The follow figure shows a network example where the Switch is used to relay DHCP requests for the VLAN1 and VLAN2 domains There is only one DHCP server that services the DHCP clients in both domains Figure 158 Global DHCP Relay Network Example ho DHCP Server B 7 192 168 1 100 i i LU Internet Y eee eee ees N VLAN2 Configure the DHCP Relay screen as shown Make sure you select the Option 82 check box to set the Switch to send additional information such as the VLAN ID MGS 3712 MGS 37
144. abled even though the port security is not activated MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 171 Chapter 19 Port Security 19 2 Port Sec urity Setup Click Advanced Application gt Port Security in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 92 Advanced Application gt Port Security MAC Freeze Port List Port Security Active Port Active Oi MW 4 00 07 S amp B win aHa HaHaHa Hn HoHo Hinta Hn c OLDEST VLAN MAC Address Limit MAC freeze Address Learning Limited Number of Learned MAC Address v dl GTV9 090 TT TU 9 49 DL Apply A The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 43 Advanced Application gt Port Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable port security on the Switch Port List Enter the number of the port s separated by a comma on which you want to enable port security and disable MAC address learning After you click MAC freeze all previously learned MAC addresses on the specified port s will become static MAC addresses and display in the Static MAC Forwarding screen MAC freeze Click MAC freeze to have the Switch automatically select the Active check boxes and clear the Address Learning check boxes only for the ports specified in the Port list Port This field displays the port number 172 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 19 Port Security Table 43 Advanced Applicat
145. abled on a port s in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices A and B C D and E automatically allow frames with MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN VLAN group tags 1 and 2 VLAN groups that are unknown to those switches to pass through their VLAN trunking port s Figure 47 Port VLAN Trunking c E TN EB N V1 v2 D V1 v2 9 4 Select the VLAN Type Select a VLAN type in the Basic Setting gt Switch Setup screen Figure 48 Switch Setup Select VLAN Type Switch Setup 8021Q VLAN Type C Port Based 9 5 Static VLAN Use a static VLAN to decide whether an incoming frame on a port should be sent to a VLAN group as normal depending on its VLAN tag sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not blocked from a VLAN group regardless of its VLAN tag You can also tag all outgoing frames that were previously untagged from a port with the specified VID MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 5 1 Static VLAN Status See Section 9 1 on page 95 for more information on Static VLAN Click Advanced Application gt VLAN from the navigation panel to display the VLAN Status screen as shown next Figure 49 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status Change Pages VLAN Status J VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN VLAN Search by VID Search The Number of VLAN 1 Index VID Elapsed Time Status
146. agged frames on this port All tagged frames will be dropped VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers but not ports directly connected to end users to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through the Switch Isolation Select this to allows this port to communicate only with the CPU management port and the ports on which the isolation feature is not enabled Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 9 6 Subnet Based VLANs Subnet based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the source IP subnet you specify When a frame is received on a port the Switch checks if a tag is added already and the IP subnet it came from The untagged packets from the same IP subnet are then placed in the same subnet based VLAN One advantage of using subnet based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to traffic from the same IP subnet For example an ISP Internet Services Provider may divide different types of services it provides to customers into different IP subnets Traffic for voice services is designated for IP subnet 172 16 1 0 24 video for 192 168 1 0 24 and dat
147. al C Fixed C Forbidden MV Tx Tagging 27 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Tx Tagging 28 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden MV Tx Tagging VLAN Status M Tx Tagging Ada Cancel Clear 8 Click the VLAN Status link in the Static VLAN screen and then the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen Figure 29 Tutorial Click the VLAN Port Setting Link OMELET VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN VLAN Search by VID Search The Number of VLAN 2 index VID Elapsed Time Status 1 1 3151 15 Static vi 102 0 00 12 Static 9 Enter 102 in the PVI D field for port 2 to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials 10 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Figure 30 Tutorial Add Tag for Frames Received on Port 2 c OMELETTE Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status GVRP m Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation rj ee 3n far rj 1 r fi O Ai j C 7 3 ri INNEENNE ar m 4 o E cs IH far m m 5 0 O A gt O O 6 i E a rz ri 7 E a rj m m 8 m E 1 s Al m 9 0 O A gt E O 10 es a zl m LL ee N a d Cancel 11 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration perma
148. alid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log ios hes is 2 the Switch sends 5 syslog messages every 2 seconds Log interval Enter how often 1 86400 seconds the Switch sends a batch of syslog messages to the syslog server Enter 0 if you want the Switch to send syslog messages immediately See Syslog rate for an example of the relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 26 7 1 ARP Inspection Port Configure Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for ARP inspection You can also specify the maximum rate at which the Switch receives MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard ARP packets on each untrusted port To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt Port Figure 134 ARP Inspection Port Configure Port WO DW Wi M nN F amp F Wi ni o FOI S NA 1 Tr U U OF Inspection Port Configure usted State ntrusted v ntrusted v ntrusted ntrusted v ntrusted v ntrusted ntrusted v ntrusted
149. allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other for example between conference rooms in a hotel you must define the egress an egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves for both ports Port based VLANs are specific only to the Switch on which they were created Note When you activate port based VLAN the Switch uses a default VLAN ID of 1 You cannot change it Note In screens such as IP Setup and Filtering that require a VID you must enter 1 as the VID The port based VLAN setup screen is shown next The CPU management port forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide EUN Chapter 9 VLAN 9 11 1 Configure a Port based VLAN Select Port Based as the VLAN Type in the Basic Setting gt Switch Setup screen and then click Advanced Application gt VLAN from the navigation panel to display the next screen Figure 58 Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected All connected Apply Setting Wizard ena e wed sed Ine tesa ala a 2 B ae e e BEBEN po gt gt e BRRR ESERE EE BEEBE ss BB BEEBE BB BEEBE s BB LE Bl 12 Vv Vv i iv Vv 10 e e e e e DEBED e INS NN ISO 333335 oo IIIS BBP hbo oo ooo Bis al mame n 00020 8 aie Outgoing 12 10 Apply Cancel MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Figure 59 Port Based VLAN Setup Port Isolation
150. ame to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN You can configure the system name in the General Setup screen See Chapter 8 on page 79 You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 26 5 on page 246 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 79 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 26 6 ARP Inspection Status Use this screen to look at the current list of MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified an unauthorized ARP packet When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection Figure 130 ARP Inspection Status c OF SiS VLAN Status Log Status Confiqure IPSG Total number of filters 0 Index Mac Address VID Port Expiry sec Reason Delete x O Delete Cancel The
151. an edit the entry later Server Address Enter the IP address of the syslog server Log Level Select the severity level s of the logs that you want the device to send to this syslog server The lower the number the more critical the logs are Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to return the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the index number of a syslog server entry Click this number to edit the entry Active This field displays Yes if the device is to send logs to the syslog server No displays if the device is not to send logs to the syslog server P Address This field displays the IP address of the syslog server Log Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server Delete Select an entry s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 333 Chapter 36 Syslog MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Cluster Management This chapter introduces cluster management 37 1 Cluster Management Status Overv
152. ancel Renew MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 77 DHCP Snooping Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch You still have to enable DHCP snooping on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports Note If DHCP is enabled and there are no trusted ports DHCP requests will not succeed DHCP Vlan Select a VLAN ID if you want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to DHCP servers on a specific VLAN Note You have to enable DHCP snooping on the DHCP VLAN too You can enable Option82 in the DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure screen Section 26 5 2 on page 249 to help the DHCP servers distinguish between DHCP requests from different VLAN Select Disable if you do not want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to a specific VLAN Database If Timeout interval is greater than Write delay interval it is possible that the next update is scheduled to occur before the current update has finished successfully or timed out In this case the Switch waits to start the next update until it completes the current one Agent URL Enter the location of the DHCP snooping database The location should be expressed like this tftp domain name or IP address directory if applicable file name for example tftp 192 168 10 1 database txt Timeout interval Enter how long 10 65535 second
153. ancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 31 Differentiated Services 31 3 1 Configuring 2 Rate 3 Color Marker Settings Use this screen to configure TRTCM settings Click the 2 rate 3 Color Marker link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next Note You cannot enable both TRTCM and Bandwidth Control at the same time Figure 154 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker olor Marker Rc Active Ci amp color blind Port oO 2 OH 0 o fF wn ch GN M Active r xl MA Oi gm dg dir Mode Commit Rate Kbps fi Kbps fi Kbps li Kbps fi Kbps fi Kbps fi Kbps fi Kbps fi Kbps fi Kbps fi Kbps fi Kbps fi Kbps C color aware Peak Rate Kbps fi Kbps fi Kbps fi Kbps f Kbps f Kbps f Kbps Kbps f Kbps f Kbps fi Kbps Kbps f Kbps green DSCP yellow Diffserv red N Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 92 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to activate TRTCM Two Rate Three Color Marker on the Switch The Switch evaluates and marks the packets based on the TRTCM settings Note You must also activate DiffServ on the Switch and the individual ports for the Switch to drop red high loss priority colored packets Mode Se
154. anges to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the above fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 276 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 30 Static Route Table 90 IP Application gt Static Routing continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of the route Click a number to edit the static route entry Active This field displays Yes when the static route is activated and NO when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this route This is for identification purposes only Destination This field displays the IP network address of the final destination Address Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask for this destination Gateway This field displays the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an Address immediate neighbor of your Switch that will forward the packet to the destination Metric This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 277 Chapter 30 Static Route 278 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 31 1 31 1 1 Differentiated Services This chapter describes how Differentiated Servi
155. anumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your RADIUS accounting server settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the RADIUS accounting server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS accounting server entry P Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS accounting server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS server for accounting is 1813 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Table 66 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Shared Secret Specif
156. ar to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to change the settings Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purpose only MAC Address This field displays the source destination MAC address with the VLAN identification number to which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the VLAN group identification number Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox es in the Delete column MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch supports Spanning Tree Protocol STP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP as defined in the following standards e EEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol EEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol e EEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch also allows you to set up multiple STP configurations or trees Ports can then be assigned to the trees 13 1 STP RSTP Overview R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a switch to interact with other R STP compliant switches
157. are browse the location of the binary BIN file and click Upgrade button File Path Browse Rebooting Upgrade Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the Switch in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it Select the Rebooting checkbox if you want to reboot the Switch and apply the new firmware immediately Firmware upgrades are only applied after a reboot Click Upgrade to load the new firmware After the firmware upgrade process is complete see the System Info screen to verify your current firmware version number 33 6 Restore a Configuration File Restore a previously saved configuration from your computer to the Switch using the Restore Configuration screen Figure 167 Management gt Maintenance gt Restore Configuration Restore Configuratio n g Maintenance To restore the device s configuration form a file browse to the location of the configuration file and click Restore button File Path Browse Restore Type the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it After you have specified the file click Restore config is the name of the configuration file on the Switch so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when you restore using this screen MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 33 Maintenance 33 7 Backup a Configuration File Ba
158. as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 371 Appendix B Legal Information 372 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations FCC Warning This device has been tested and
159. ase maintains the dynamic bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection in a file on an external TFTP server If you set up the DHCP snooping database the Switch can reload the dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database after the Switch restarts MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard You can configure the name and location of the file on the external TFTP server The file has the following format Figure 122 DHCP Snooping Database File Format initial checksum TYPE DHCP SNOOPING VERSION 1 BEGIN binding 1 checksum 1 binding 2 lt checksum 1 2 gt lt binding n gt checksum 1 2 n END The lt initial checksum gt helps distinguish between the bindings in the latest update and the bindings from previous updates Each binding consists of 72 bytes a space and another checksum that is used to validate the binding when it is read If the calculated checksum is not equal to the checksum in the file that binding and all others after it are ignored 26 1 1 3 DHCP Relay Option 82 Information The Switch can add information to DHCP requests that it does not discard This provides the DHCP server more information about the source of the requests The Switch can add the following information Slot ID 1 byte port ID 1 byte and source VLAN ID 2 bytes System name up to 32 bytes This information is stored in an Agent Information field in the
160. at any untagged frames received on that port get sent to VLAN 2 Figure 38 Initial Setup Network Example Port VID ESTR NE oe i i f 1 N VLAN 1 N VLAN2 i i ii gd oom I SR 8 SERA SAN 1 s OPEIN ERARIO 1 Click Advanced Applications ng Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vian VLAN Status gt VLAN in the navigation panel GvRP r Then click the VLAN Port H i Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation Setting link i ON a S il n 2 n All x m H 2 Enter 2 in the PVID field for 2 CN Ec M IET a E i 3 n 1 r All Y m Oo port 1 and click Apply to save 4 a ft m al z s 5 O 1 D All g m n your changes back to the run pop qux E time memory Settings in the 7 Hn fi r All r r ti t h 8 n 1 B All 7 r run time memory are lost when ro qpeBr A the Switch s power is turned off 10 ow r Al E o r 11 r 1 r All hd H r 12 n 1 n All bal E r Apply Cancel MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 6 Initial Setup Example 6 2 Configuring Switch Management IP Address The default management IP address of the Switch is 192 168 1 1 You can configure another IP address in a different subnet for management purposes The following figure shows an example Figure 39 Initial Setup Example Management IP Address Internet NG id 192 168 1 x Vs VLAN 1 Em VLAN2 5 i i 1 Connect
161. atabase when the Switch started up or a new URL is configured for the DHCP snooping database MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 76 DHCP Snooping continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Successful This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings transfers from or updated the bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from or update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database Successful reads This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed reads This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from the DHCP snooping database Successful writes This field displays the number of times the Switch updated the bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed writes This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database Database detail First successful access This field displays the first time the Switch accessed the DHCP snooping database for any reason Last ignored bindings counters This section displays the number of times and the reasons the Switch ignored bindings the last time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database You can clear these counter
162. ation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 13 1 on page 125 for more information on RSTP Note This screen is only available after you activate RSTP on the Switch Figure 74 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP O Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 0000 000000000000 Hello Time second 0 0 Max Age second 0 0 Forwarding Delay second 0 0 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 28 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click RSTP to edit RSTP settings on the Switch Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits second a configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide
163. b Configurator Table 5 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION System Info General Setup This link takes you to a screen that displays general system and hardware monitoring information This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identification information about the Switch Switch Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global Switch parameters such as VLAN type MAC address learning GARP and priority queues IP Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IP address subnet mask necessary for Switch management and DNS domain name server and set up to 64 IP routing domains Port Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure settings for individual Switch ports Advanced Application VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can configure port based or 802 1Q VLAN depending on what you configured in the Switch Setup menu You can also configure a subnet based VLAN in these screens Static MAC This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static MAC Forwarding addresses for a port These static MAC addresses do not age out Static This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static multicast Multicast MAC addresses for port s These static multicast MAC addresses do not Forwarding age out Filtering This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules Spa
164. ber MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics Table 7 Status Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Status If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 13 1 on page 125 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This field shows if LACP is enabled on this port or not TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the number kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx KB s Up Time This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port This field shows the total amount of time the connection has been up Tx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets transmitted TX Packet This field shows the number of good packets unicast multicast and broadcast transmitted Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets transmitted Broadcas t This field shows the number of good broadcast packets transmitted Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets transmitted Tagged This
165. ber and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for that port or select Any to clear statistics for all ports MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics 7 2 1 Status Port Details Click a number in the Port column in the Status screen to display individual port statistics Use this screen to check status and detailed performance data about an individual port on the Switch Figure 41 Status gt Port Details ED Port Detalls g Port Status Port Info Port NO 1 Name Link Down Status STOP LACP Disabled TxPkts D RxPkts 0 Errors 0 Tx KBs s 0 0 Rx KBsis 0 0 Up Time 0 00 00 TX Packet TX Packets Multicast Broadcast Pause Tagged RX Packet RX Packets Multicast Broadcast Pause Control TX Collision Single Multiple Excessive Late Error Packet RX CRC Length Runt Distribution 64 65 to 127 128 to 255 256 to 511 51210 1023 1024 to 1518 Giant 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 B20 0 0 B 0 0 0 0 O8 0 0 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Status Port Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Info Port NO This field displays the port number you are viewing Name This field displays the name of the port Link This field displays the speed either 10M for 10Mbps 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for 1000Mbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for half duplex It also shows the cable type Copper or Fi
166. bers of that group thus allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your Switch MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 42 Product Specifications Table 125 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Classifier and Policy You can create a policy to define actions to be performed on a traffic flow grouped by a classifier according to specific criteria such as the IP address port number or protocol type etc Queuing Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion The following scheduling services are supported Strict Priority Queuing SPQ Weighted Round Robin WRR and Weighted Fair Queuing WFQ This allows the Switch to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth Bandwidth Control Broadcast Storm Control Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and or out going traffic flows on a port Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast multicast and destination lookup failure DLF packets the Switch receives per second on the ports Differentiated Services DiffServ With DiffServ the Switch marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Two Rate Three Color Marke
167. ble VLAN mapping on the Switch Port This field displays the port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the VLAN mapping feature on this port Clear this check box to disable the VLAN mapping feature Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 28 VLAN Mapping 28 3 Configuring VLAN Mapping Click the VLAN Mapping Configure link in the VLAN Mapping screen to display the screen as shown Use this screen to enable and edit the VLAN mapping rule s Figure 143 VLAN Mapping Configuration a VLAN TE T VLAN Mapping Active L1 Name Port VID Translated VID Priority D Index Active Name Port VID Translated VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 88 VLAN Mapping Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this rule Name Enter a descrip
168. c MAC Forward Setup Use these screens to configure static MAC address forwarding 10 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure forwarding rules based on MAC addresses of devices on your network 10 2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding A static MAC address is an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address table Static MAC addresses do not age out When you set up static MAC address rules you are setting static MAC addresses for a port This may reduce the need for broadcasting Static MAC address forwarding together with port security allow only computers in the MAC address table on a port to access the Switch See Chapter 19 on page 171 for more information on port security MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 115 Chapter 10 Static MAC Forward Setup Click Advanced Applications gt Static MAC Forwarding in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 60 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding Static MAC Forwarding Active C Name MAC Address VID Port Add Cancel Clear index Active Name MAC Address VID Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 21 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box Name Ente
169. cation authorization accounting or all of them on the Switch First configure your authentication and accounting server settings RADIUS TACACS or both and then set up the authentication priority activate authorization and configure accounting settings ES MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Click Advanced Application gt AAA in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 118 Advanced Application gt AAA Ce RADIUS Server Setup Click Here TACACS Server Setup Click Here AAA Setup Click Here 25 2 1 RADIUS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your RADIUS server settings See Section 25 1 2 on page 222 for more information on RADIUS servers and Section 25 3 on page 231 for RADIUS attributes utilized by the aut hentication and accounting features on the Switch Click on the RADIUS Server Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown Figure 119 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup OSS AAA Authentication Server Mode index priority 7 Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 1812 O 2 0 0 0 0 1812 O Apply Cancel Accounting Server Timeout o seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 1813 O 2 0 0 0 0 1813 O Apply Cancel MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA The following table describes the labels
170. cations 1 Go to http www zyxel com 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchas
171. ce guard uses a binding table to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network A binding contains these key attributes MAC address VLAN ID P address Port number When the Switch receives a DHCP or ARP packet it looks up the appropriate MAC address VLAN ID IP address and port number in the binding table If there is a binding the Switch forwards the packet If there is not a binding the Switch discards the packet The Switch builds the binding table by snooping DHCP packets dynamic bindings and from information provided manually by administrators static bindings IP source guard consists of the following features Static bindings Use this to create static bindings in the binding table DHCP snooping Use this to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding table dynamically ARP inspection Use this to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network If you want to use dynamic bindings to filter unauthorized ARP packets typical implementation you have to enable DHCP snooping before you enable ARP inspection MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 235 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 26 1 1 DHCP Snooping Overview Use DHCP snooping to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding table dynamically This can prevent clients from getting IP addresses from unauthorized DHCP servers 26 1 1 1 Trusted vs Untrus
172. cel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule 21 4 Policy Example The figure below shows an example Policy screen where you configure a policy to limit bandwidth and discard out of profile traffic on a traffic flow classified using the Example classifier refer to Section 20 4 on page 182 Figure 99 Policy Example Name Classifier s General Egress Port 1 Priority o DSCP TOS o Forwarding Parameters No change C Discard the packet C Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Priority No change C Setthe packet s 802 1 priority C Send the packet to priority queue C Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value Diffserv No change Action C Setthe packet s TOS field C Replace the IP TOS field with the 802 1 priority value C Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Outgoing Send the packetto the mirror port Sendthe packetto the egress port Metering Enable Iv Drop the packet Out of profile Change the DSCP value action SetOutDrop Precedence Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Metering fiooo Kbps E Add Cancel Clear MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Queuing Method This chapter introduces the queuing methods supported 22 1 Que
173. cept your ying to i If you suspect the certificate shown does not belong to 192 168 1 1 please cancel the connection and notify the site administrator View Certificate Cancel Help MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 34 Access Control 34 8 3 The Main Screen After you accept the certificate and enter the login username and password the Switch main screen appears The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar denotes a secure connection Figure 180 Example Lock Denoting a Secure Connection File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt OA A Qsearch Giravortes Beda E 2 Dil 5 di esr BADE Peo tinks Google G zh Qsetingsy B Save Status A Logout B Help Port Name Link State Lace TxPkts RxPkts Errors TxKB s RxKB s Up Time Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 P Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Management 3 Down og Disabled g 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down S j 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down Sox AGLI 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 B Down Or preamen 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 E Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 41 100M F Copper FORWARDING Disabled 5589 12719 0 0 0 0 0 2 38 11 12 100MiF Copper FORWARDING Disabled 15091 7547 0 40 296 3 765 2 38 11 G Any Clear Counter Copyright 1995 2208 v ZyXEL Commu
174. ces MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forward Setup connected to port 3 Figure 63 shows frames being forwarded to ports 2 and 3 within VLAN group 4 Figure 61 No Static Multicast Forwarding 11 2 Configuring Static Multicast Forwarding Use this screen to configure rules to forward specific multicast frames such as streaming or control frames to specific port s MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forward Setup Click Advanced Applications gt Static Multicast Forwarding to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 64 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding Static Multicast Forwarding Active Vv Name Static Multicast Rule Example MAC Address for oo e o o O VID NN us ic m Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 22 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this static multicast MAC address forwarding rule This is for identification only MAC Address Enter a multicast MAC address which identifies the multicast group The
175. ces DiffServ fits into a quality of service strategy and shows you how to configure Two Rate Three Color Marker traffic policing on the Switch DiffServ Overview Quality of Service QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the flow are given the same priority You can use CoS class of service to give different priorities to different packet types DiffServ is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service ToS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels and the remaining 2 bits are defined as currently unused CU The following figure illustrates the DS field Figure 149 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field DSCP 6 bits CU 2 bits
176. chapter introduces ARP Table 39 1 ARP Table Overview Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network An IP version 4 address is 32 bits long In an Ethernet LAN MAC addresses are 48 bits long The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address 39 1 1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the Switch the Switch s ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address sends it to the device If no entry is found for the IP address ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN The Switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field In addition the Switch puts all ones in the target MAC field FF FF FF FF FF FF is the Ethernet broadcast address The replying device which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way replaces the broadcast address with the target s MAC address swaps the sender and target pairs and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guid
177. cking up your Switch configurations allows you to create various snap shots of your device from which you may restore at a later date Back up your current Switch configuration to a computer using the Backup Configuration screen Figure 168 Management gt Maintenance gt Backup Configuration Backup Configuration _ _ Maintenance This page allows you to back up the device s current configuration to your workstation Now click the Backup button Backup Follow the steps below to back up the current Switch configuration to your computer in this screen 1 Click Backup 2 Click Save to display the Save As screen 3 Choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop down list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box Click Save to save the configuration file to your computer 33 8 FTP Command Line This section shows some examples of uploading to or downloading files from the Switch using FTP commands First understand the filename conventions 33 8 1 Filename Conventions The configuration file also known as the romfile or ROM contains the factory default settings in the screens such as password Switch setup IP Setup and so on Once you have customized the Switch s settings they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 33 Maintenance 33 8 1 1 ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operat
178. configure the Switch to generate log messages when ARP packets are discarded or forwarded based on the VLAN ID of the ARP packet See Section 26 7 2 on page 258 Time This field displays when the log message was generated 26 7 ARP Inspection Configure Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You can also configure the length of time the Switch stores records of discarded ARP packets and global MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard settings for the ARP inspection log To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure Figure 133 ARP Inspection Configure ARP SE Port VLAN ARP Inspection Active Filter Aging Time Filter aging time 300 seconds Log Profile Log buffer size 32 entries Syslog rate 5 entries Log interval 1 seconds Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 83 ARP Inspection Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You still have to enable ARP inspection on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports Filter Aging Time Filter aging time This setting has no effect on existing MAC address filters Enter how long 1 2147483647 seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch after the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet The Switch automatically deletes the MAC address f
179. d VI D fields and click Apply Then select Yes in the Enabled field of the VLAN 100 entry shown at the bottom section of the screen If you want to add more information in the DHCP request packets such as source VLAN ID or system name you can also select the Option82 and Information fields in the entry See Section 26 1 1 3 on page 237 Figure 24 Tutorial Enable DHCP Snooping on this VLAN Au Snooping VLA onfigure Configure Show VLAN End vip 100 Start vip 100 VID Enabled Option82 Information a 100 m n No 4 Apply Cancel MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials 8 Click Save at the top right corner of the web configurator to save the configuration permanently 9 Connect your DHCP server to port 5 and a computer as DHCP client to either port 6 or 7 The computer should be able to get an IP address from the DHCP server If you put the DHCP server on port 6 or 7 the computer will not able to get an IP address 10 To check if DHCP snooping works go to Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard you should see an IP assignment with the type dhcp snooping as shown Figure 25 Tutorial Check the Binding If DHCP Snooping Works IP Source Guard J Static Binding DHCP Snooping ARP Inspection Port index MAC Address IP Address Lease Type VID 00 02 00 00 00 1c 10 10 1 16 6d23h17m 0s dhcp snooping 100 You can also telnet or log in
180. d fan speeds on the Switch Your Switch can respond to an external signal in four ways The ALM LED shows an alert The Signal slot can send an external alarm on to another device By daisy chaining the signal sensor cables from one Switch to another ZyXEL switch which supports this feature the external alarm alert but not the system alarm is received on each Switch The Switch can also be configured to send an SNMP trap to the SNMP server See Section 34 3 on page 306 for more information on using SNMP The Switch can be configured to create an error log of the alarm See Section 36 1 on page 331 for more information on using the system log Connect a Sensor to the Signal Slot This section shows you how to connect an external sensor device to the Switch Use a connector to connect wires of the correct gauge to the sensor s signal output pins See Chapter 42 on page 357 for the wire specifications Check the sensor s documentation to identify its two signal output pins Connect these two wires to any one of the following pairs of signal input pins on the Switch s Signal connector 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 The pin numbers run from the right side of the connector to the left 2a Connect each of the sensor s two signal output wires to the Signal connector by depressing the spring clip corresponding to the pin you are connecting to 2b Insert the wire and release the spring clip 2c Repeat the process for the sensor s oth
181. d range is between 1 and ID 4094 Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Table 16 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Control Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP This is the default selection Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN Group ID Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to change the fields back to their last saved values Clear Click Clear to start configuring the screen again VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Click the number to edit the VLAN settings
182. details The following table describes the syslog severity levels Table 114 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY Emergency The system is unusable Alert Action must be taken immediately Critical The system condition is critical Error There is an error condition on the system Warning There is a warning condition on the system Notice There is a normal but significant condition on the system Informational The syslog contains an informational message N ODO Om AJ wji NI FR oO Debug The message is intended for debug level purposes MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 331 Chapter 36 Syslog 36 2 Syslog Setup Click Management gt Syslog in the navigation panel to display this screen The syslog feature sends logs to an external syslog server Use this screen to configure the device s system logging settings Figure 184 Management gt Syslog Syslog Setup Syslog Server Setup Syslog Active M Logging type Active Facility System iv local use 0 Interface iv local use 0 j Switch iv local use 0 J ABA Vv local use 0 IP Vv local use 0 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 115 Management gt Syslog LABEL Syslog DESCRIPTION Select Active to turn on syslog system logging and then configure the syslog setting Logging Type Active This column displays the names of the categories of
183. dresses To specify a destination select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Layer 3 Specify th e fields below to configure a layer 3 classifier DSCP IP Protocol Select Any to classify traffic from any DSCP or select the second option and specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 in the field provided Select an IP protocol type or select Other and enter the protocol number in decimal value Refer to Table 48 on page 181 for more information You may select Establish Only for TCP protocol type This means that the Switch will pick out the packets that are sent to establish TCP connections Source IP Address Address Prefix Enter a source IP address in dotted decimal notation Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask A subnet mask can be represented in a 32 bit notation For example the subnet mask 255 255 255 0 can be represented as 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 and counting up the number of ones in this case results in 24 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 179 Chapter 20 Classifier Table 45 Advanced Application gt Classifier continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Socket Number Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP prot
184. ds the Switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All Switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Maximum hops Enter the number of hops between 1 and 255 in an MSTP region before the BPDU is discarded and the port information is aged Configuration Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 characters of an MST region Revision Number Enter a number to identify a region s configuration Devices must have the same revision number to belong to the same region Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is t
185. dth control 147 361 egress rate 149 ingress rate 148 setup 148 basic settings 79 basic setup tutorial 45 binding 235 binding table 235 building 235 BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units 126 BPS LED 43 Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs 126 bridging 361 broadcast storm control 151 C CDP 272 certifications 371 notices 372 viewing 373 CFI Canonical Format Indicator 95 changing the password 62 CIR Committed Information Rate 147 Cisco Discovery Protocol see CDP CIST 130 Class of Service CoS 279 classifier 177 180 and QoS 177 editing 180 example 182 overview 177 setup 177 180 viewing 180 cloning a port See port cloning MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Index 376 cluster management 335 and switch passwords 341 cluster manager 335 340 cluster member 335 341 cluster member firmware upgrade 338 network example 336 setup 340 specification 335 status 336 switch models 335 VID 341 web configurator 337 cluster manager 335 cluster member 335 Committed Information Rate CIR 147 Common and Internal Spanning Tree See CIST 130 configuration 277 change running config 299 configuration file 63 backup 301 restore 63 300 saving 298 configuration saving 62 console port 35 copying port settings See port cloning copyright 371 CPU management port 111 current date 83 current time 83 D daylight saving time 83 default Ethernet settings 36 default IP address 38 DHCP 287 configuration options 28
186. dynamic or compatible mode In dynamic mode the Switch sends IGMP leave and join reports to the other multicast devices such as multicast routers or servers in the multicast VLAN This allows the multicast devices to update the multicast forwarding table to forward or not forward multicast traffic to the receiver ports In compatible mode the Switch does not send any IGMP reports In this case you must manually configure the forwarding settings on the multicast devices in the multicast VLAN How MVR Works The following figure shows a multicast television example where a subscriber device such as a computer in VLAN 1 receives multicast traffic from the streaming media server S via the Switch Multiple subscriber devices can connect through a port configured as the receiver on the Switch When the subscriber selects a television channel computer A sends an IGMP report to the Switch to join the appropriate multicast group If the IGMP report matches one of the configured MVR multicast group addresses on the Switch an entry is created in the forwarding table on the Switch This maps the subscriber VLAN to the list of forwarding destinations for the specified multicast traffic When the subscriber changes the channel or turns off the computer an IGMP leave message is sent to the Switch to leave the multicast group The Switch sends a query to VLAN 1 on the receiver port in this case a DSL port on the Switch If there is another subsc
187. e Chapter 9 VLAN static VLAN click Static VLAN in the VLAN Status screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 51 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN ED Static VLAN g ACTIVE Name VLAN Group ID Port Norma gt Norma Normal Norma Normal Norma Norma oin oan fF wh Oj Norma o Oj Norma 3 D Norma Norma S d Norma VID Active Yes Il r m m Control Normal C Fixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden Add Cancel Clear Name 1 VLAN Status Tagging v TxTagging v TxTagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging v TxTagging v Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging v TxTagging v TxTagging M TxTagging v Tx Tagging v TxTagging Delete r Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 16 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE Select this check box to activate the VLAN settings Name Enter a descriptive name for the VLAN group for identification purposes This name consists of up to 64 printable characters VLAN Group Enter the VLAN ID for this static entry the vali
188. e Clear to remove all VLAN s from being mapped to this MST instance Enabled This field displays which VLAN s are mapped to this MST instance VLAN s Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to add this port to the MST instance Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 24 on page 126 for more information Add Click Add to save this MST instance to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this change if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh
189. e 347 Chapter 39 ARP Table 39 2 Viewing the ARP Table Click Management gt ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the following screen Use the ARP table to view IP to MAC address mapping s Figure 193 Management gt ARP Table Index Ski ah Hoe EE E ot bent as foe CO Co Oh ek won 2 Oo VANDA amp WN ED ARP OD IP Address 172 21 0 2 172 21 3 16 172 21 3 19 172 21 3 40 172 21 3 66 172 21 3 90 172 21 3 91 172 21 3 95 172 21 3 120 172 21 3 138 172 21 4 99 172 21 10 11 172 21 100 153 172 21 207 247 192 168 1 1 192 158 1 5 192 168 1 10 192 168 1 100 MAC Address 00 05 5d 04 30 fl 00 05 1c 15 08 71 O0 0b cd 8c 6d ed 00 0c 76 07 41 0d 00 50 8d 47 73 4f 00 05 5d f4 49 20 00 50 ba ad 56 7c 00 10 b5 ae 56 97 00 1 0 b5 ae 62 32 00 a0 c5 b2 62 26 00 0 76 09 cf 88 08 00 20 ad f56 88 00 80 27 be a2 8c 00 0 76 09 17 1a 00 a0 c5 3f 81 56 00 85 30 01 01 04 0 a0 c5 5e df f8 00 85 a0 01 01 00 Type dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic static dynamic The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 122 Management gt ARP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the ARP Table entry number IP Address _ This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a Switch port with corresponding MAC address below MAC This is the MAC address of the device
190. e ID number of the VLAN to which these DHCP settings apply Remote DHCP Server 1 3 Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation Relay Agent Information Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot number port number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information Add This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup screen Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click this to clear the fields above VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings apply Type This field displays the DHCP mode Relay DHCP Status For DHCP relay configuration this field displays the first remote DHCP server IP address Delete Select the configuration entries you want to remove and click Delete to remove them Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 32 4 1 Example DHCP Relay for Two VLANs The following
191. e IGMP filtering profile to use for this port Otherwise select Default to prohibit the port from joining any multicast group You can create IGMP filtering profiles in the Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile screen IGMP Querier Mode The Switch treats an IGMP query port as being connected to an IGMP multicast router or server The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP query port Select Auto to have the Switch use the port as an IGMP query port if the port receives IGMP query packets Select Fixed to have the Switch always use the port as an IGMP query port Select this when you connect an IGMP multicast server to the port Select Edge to stop the Switch from using the port as an IGMP query port The Switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port The Switch does not forward IGMP join or leave packets to this port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast 24 4 IGMP Snooping VLAN Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast in the navigation panel Click the Multicast Setting link and
192. e hexadecimal number range of 0x0000 to OxO5ff are not allowed to be used for protocol based VLANs VID Enter the ID of a VLAN to which the port belongs This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the Advanced Applications gt VLAN screens Priority Select the priority level that the Switch will assign to frames belonging to this VLAN Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Index Active This is the index number identifying this protocol based VLAN Click on any of these numbers to edit an existing protocol based VLAN This field shows whether the protocol based VLAN is active or not Port This field shows which port belongs to this protocol based VLAN Name This field shows the name the protocol based VLAN Ethernet Type This field shows which Ethernet protocol is part of this protocol based VLAN VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the port Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this protocol based VLAN Delete Click this to delete the protocol based VLANs which you marked for deletion Cancel Click Cancel to begin
193. e settings you configure on one port to another port or ports Syslog The Switch can generate syslog messages and send it to a syslog server Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware when available from the ZyXEL web site and use the web configurator CLI or an FTP TFTP tool to put it on the Switch Note Only upload firmware for your specific model Configuration Backup amp Restoration Make a copy of the Switch s configuration and put it back on the Switch later if you decide you want to revert back to an earlier configuration Cluster Management Cluster management also known as iStacking allows you to manage switches through one switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 42 Product Specifications Table 126 Feature Specifications Layer 2 Features Bridging 16K MAC addresses Static MAC address filtering by source destination Broadcast storm control Static MAC address forwarding Switching STP Qos Switching fabric 24 Gbps non blocking Max Frame size 9 K bytes Forwarding frame IEEE 802 3 IEEE 802 1q Ethernet II PPPoE Prevent the forwarding of corrupted packets IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree capability 2 configurable trees IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tr
194. ect No change to keep the TOS and or DSCP fields in the packets Select Set the packet s TOS field to set the TOS field with the value you configure in the TOS field Select Replace the I P TOS with the 802 1 priority value to replace the TOS field with the value you configure in the Priority field Select Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame to set the DSCP field with the value you configure in the DSCP field MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule Table 50 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Outgoing Select Send the packet to the mirror port to send the packet to the mirror port Select Send the packet to the egress port to send the packet to the egress port Metering Select Enable to activate bandwidth limitation on the traffic flow s then set the actions to be taken on out of profile packets Out of profile Select the action s to be performed for out of profile traffic action Select Drop the packet to discard the out of profile traffic Select Change the DSCP value to replace the DSCP field with the value specified in the Out of profile DSCP field Select Set Out Drop Precedence to mark out of profile traffic and drop it when network is congested Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to queue the frames that are marked to be dropped Add Click Add to inset the entry to the summary table below and
195. ed VID This is the VLAN ID that replaces the customer VLAN ID in the tagged packets Priority This is the priority level that replaces the customer priority level in the tagged packets Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling This chapter shows you how to configure layer 2 protocol tunneling on the Switch 29 1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Overview Layer 2 protocol tunneling L2PT is used on the service provider s edge devices L2PT allows edge switches 1 and 2 in the following figure to tunnel layer 2 STP Spanning Tree Protocol CDP Cisco Discovery Protocol and VTP VLAN Trunking Protocol packets between customer switches A B and C in the following figure connected through the service provider s network The edge switch encapsulates layer 2 protocol packets with a specific MAC address before sending them across the service provider s network to other edge switches Figure 144 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Network Scenario Service Provider s In the following example if you enable L2PT for STP you can have switches A B C and D in the same Spanning tree even though switch A is not directly connected to switches B C and D Topology change information can be propagated throughout the service provider s network
196. ed for a username Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 33 Maintenance 6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the Switch for example put firmware bin ras transfers the firmware on your computer firmware bin to the Switch and renames it to ras Similarly put config cfg config transfers the configuration file on your computer config cfg to the Switch and renames it to config Likewise get config config cfg transfers the configuration file on the Switch to your computer and renames it to config cfg See Table 100 on page 302 for more information on filename conventions 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt 33 8 3 GUl based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI based FTP clients General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTION Host Address Enter the address of the host server Login Type Anonymous This is when a user I D and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option Normal The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login Transfer Type Transfer files in either ASCII plain text format or in binary mode Configuration and firmware files should be transferred in binar
197. ee Section 5 6 on page 63 forgot the username and or password 1 The default username is admin and the default password is 1234 2 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 5 6 on page 63 cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 41 Troubleshooting The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 f you changed the IP address use the new IP address f you changed the IP address and have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for forgot the IP address for the Switch 2 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 3 3 on page 43 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled 4 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the Switch If you know that there are routers between your computer and the Switch skip this step 5 Reset the device to its factory defaults and try to access the Switch with the default IP address See Section 5 6 on page 63 6 If the problem continues contact the vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions Try to access the Switch using another service such as Telnet If you can access the Switch check the remote management settings to find out w
198. ee Protocol IEEE 802 1p Eight priority queues per port Port based egress traffic shaping Rule based traffic mirroring Supports IGMP snooping VLAN Port based VLAN setting Tag based IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Number of VLAN 4K 4K static maximum Supports GVRP for dynamic registration Double tagging for VLAN stacking Private VLAN for port isolation Protocol Based VLAN IP subnet based VLAN VLAN mapping Port Aggregation Supports IEEE 802 3ad static and dynamic LACP port trunking Six groups up to 8 ports each Port mirroring All ports support port mirroring Support port mirroring per IP TCP UDP Bandwidth control Supports rate limiting at 64 Kb increments Provider Bridge BPDU transparency Layer2 protocol tunneling MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 42 Product Specifications Table 126 Feature Specifications continued Layer 3 Features IP Capability IPV4 support 64 IPV4 Management IPs Wire speed IP forwarding Routing Static Routing protocols IP services DHCP client DHCP relay VLAN based DHCP relay DHCP snooping Multicast IGMP snooping IGMP v1 v2 v3 16 VLAN maximum user configurable IGMP filtering MVR IGMP timer Multicast reserve group Static multicast IGMP snooping fast leave IGMP snooping statistics IGMP throttling AAA Support RADIUS and TACACS Security Static MAC address filtering
199. egate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link 17 1 Link Aggregation Overview Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link However the more ports you aggregate then the fewer available ports you have A trunk group is one logical link containing multiple ports The beginning port of each trunk group must be physically connected to form a trunk group The Switch supports both static and dynamic link aggregation Note In a properly planned network it is recommended to implement static link aggregation only This ensures increased network stability and control over the trunk groups on your Switch See Section 17 6 on page 162 for a static port trunking example 17 2 Dynamic Link Aggregation The Switch adheres to the IEEE 802 3ad standard for static and dynamic LACP port trunking The Switch supports the link aggregation I EEE802 3ad standard This standard describes the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP which is a protocol that dynamically creates and manages trunk groups MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 155 Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 17 2 1 When you enable LACP link aggregation on a port the port can automatically negotiate with the ports at the remote end of a link
200. eight the number you configure in the Weight field Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights WRR scheduling services queues on a rotating basis based on their queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights Q0 Q7 When you select WFQ or WRR enter the queue weight here Bandwidth Weight is divided across the different traffic queues according to their weights Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights Hybrid SPQ This field is applicable only when you select WFQ or WRR Lowest Queue Select a queue QO to Q7 to have the Switch use SPQ to service the subsequent queue s after and including the specified queue For example if you select Q5 the Switch services traffic on Q5 Q6 and Q7 using SPQ Select None to always use WFQ or WRR Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide VLAN Stacking This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN stacking on your Switch See the chapter on VLANs for more background infor
201. el to clear the selected checkbox es in the Delete column MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 175 Chapter 19 Port Security 176 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Classifier This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the packet classifier on the Switch 20 1 About the Classifier and QoS Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth Without QoS all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical application such as video on demand A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address destination address source port number destination port number or incoming port number For example you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port such as Telnet to form a flow Configure QoS on the Switch to group and prioritize application traffic and fine tune network performance Setting up QoS involves two separate steps Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows Configure policy rules to define actions to be performed on a classified traffic flow refer to Chapter 21 on page 185 to configure policy rules 20 2 Configuring the Classifier Use the Classifier screen to defi
202. ent when the MSTP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 1 root switch changes 07 70 1 MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 1 07 70 1 STPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 This trap is sent when the STP topology changes MRSTPTopologyChange MGS 3712F This trap is sent when the 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 3 MRSTP topology changes 2 2 2 MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 3 2 2 2 MSTPTopologyChange MGS 3712F This trap is sent when the MSTP 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 1 root switch changes 07 70 2 MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 1 07 70 2 mactable MacTableFullEventOn MGS 3712F This trap is sent when more 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 2 than 99 of the MAC table is 5 2 1 used MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 2 5 2 1 MacTableFullEventClear MGS 3712F This trap is sent when less than 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 2 9596 of the MAC table is used 5 2 2 MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 2 5 2 2 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 34 Access Control Table 107 SNMP Switch Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION rmon RmonRisingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 1 This trap is sent when a variable goes over the RMON rising threshold RmonFallingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 2 This trap is sent when the variable falls below the RMON falling threshold CFM dotlagCfmFaultAlarm 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 0 1 The trap is sent when the Switch detects a connectivity fault 34 3 4
203. er To obtain the services of this warranty contact your vendor You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http WWwW Zyxel com web support warranty info php Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 373 Appendix B Legal Information 374 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Index Numerics 802 1P priority 92 A AAA 221 AAA Authentication Authorization and Accounting 221 access control limitations 305 login account 319 remote management 327 service port 326 SNMP 306 accounting 221 setup 227 address learning MAC 105 108 Address Resolution Protocol ARP 347 349 350 administrator password 319 age 142 aggregator ID 159 161 aging time 85 ALM LED 43 applications backbone 23 bridging 24 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN 25 switched workgroup 25 ARP how it works 347 viewing 348 ARP Address Resolution Protocol 347 ARP inspection 235 238 and MAC filter 238 configuring 239 syslog messages 239 trusted ports 239 authentication 221 setup 227 Authentication Authorization and Accounting see AAA 221 authorization 221 privilege levels 228 setup 227 Index auto crossover 36 automatic VLAN registration 96 back up configuration file 301 Backup Power Supply BPS 42 bandwi
204. er signal output wire A total of four sensors may be connected to the Signal connector in this way using the remaining signal input pins MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 Insert the alarm connector into the Signal slot Figure 15 Connecting a Sensor to the Signal Slot Door Open Sensor Spring Clip ssa no ooo p c 6000 ENDE qo s d E sd HHHH HAH HHHH A CO0COO8o00000 Signal Input Pins Signal Dry contact Output normal open only Pins 4 To connect an output device repeat the previous steps but this time connect to either pins 1 2 or 2 3 on the Signal connector You can also daisy chain the external alarm to another ZyXEL Switch which supports the external alarm feature If daisy chaining to a ZyXEL switch that is a different model check your switch s documentation for the correct pin assignments 1 Use wires of the correct gauge to connect either of the signal output pin pairs 1 normal close 2 common or 2 common 3 normal open on the Signal connector to the input signal pin pairs of an Signal connector on another ZyXEL Switch MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 2 When daisy chaining further Switches ensure that the signal output pins you use are the same as those you used when connecting to the first switch as shown in the diagram below Figure 1
205. ervice TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping DSCP 6 bits Unused 2 bits MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies 21 2 Configuring Policy Rules You must first configure a classifier in the Classifier screen Refer to Section 20 2 on page 177 for more information MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule Click Advanced Applications gt Policy Rule in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 97 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule Active Name Classifier s Parameters Action Policy r E General Metering Bandwidth Kbps Egress Port fi E ao a Priority o DSCP TOS o Forwarding No change C Discard the packet C Do notdrop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Prior
206. es eda pem d antc acad rapi detras aon Ea re A REID En EP C Atiae 199 225 1 Ere FOUTIBD oe cute DIR doa Log popa a OC Lua So Das DR de Late EPUMSI us UR RR 199 Ba ASOT VLAN bc i RE E E LS SEES 200 EX E asc DROP e M 201 Ee Pucci PME 202 Chapter 24 Li 205 SOR MUNCIE REGIE M ain AeA 205 24 1 1 IP Bullisast Addres SOS iinsscitssenssesssaciatasscdaiwsbsssamansutcbaslusiussdaanWubsedeascnsstseadensaieeaday 205 mo 2 OMP PANS ME 205 ELE BOSE Ed erro e ETE ana gat ate 206 24 14 IGMP Snooping and VLAM coi i taebeees pagh e perd cutn pp rV d aub epPU ate osxd a EE Ee et o ERE bee 206 Mure Zt 206 zu DNC GSE ISI sass cas A E E Sins tub Deben td erai ddl der i gai Faded ad iN a Rand 207 ZO OMP SOO DINE VLAN iiec odidmpeeet dedica ules bet quide iE ONE icut P FRS dedi ea Qe PD EP 210 24 S HaME Pipi FONE uuiunidenssucogitieiitea plena rp e Phan Ce bn a afa be d bbc a ei 212 2a E MIN R ANGEN aaia ein ens ecg T IT TT 213 246 TYPOS OT MYR PONS e 214 2402 NEL Oe aoxctoasixqsageond pad Qao oup echando aas rapa dae adeps a Dn n 214 VIR M ATE P AE IT I SU LT 214 2A T General bildet p m 215 24 8 MYR Group COSTRUIRE Lcuoaauixssncmsi duae i adi inanan au UO E eub uaa Era EO 217 248 1 MYR Coniigursmten EXIME sone pu dadbt prx ea N EA 219 Chapter 25 prr 221 25 1 Authenticati
207. ess port 2 at any one time A sixth device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses aged out MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen The valid range is from O to 16384 0 means this feature is disabled Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index Active This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to change the settings This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated Port This field displays the number of the port to which this rule is applied 174 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 19 Port Security Table 44 Advanced Application gt Port Security gt VLAN MAC Address Limit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VID This is the VLAN ID number to which the port belongs Limit Number This is the maximum number of MAC addresses which a port can learn in a VLAN Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Canc
208. et index number A client set is a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Active Select this check box to activate this secured client set Clear the check box if you wish to temporarily disable the set without deleting it Start Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can Address manage this Switch End Address The Switch checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol matches the range set here The Switch immediately disconnects the session if it does not match Telnet FTP Select services that may be used for managing the Switch from the HTTP ICMP specified trusted computers SNMP SSH HTTPS Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide This chapter explains the Diagnostic screen 35 1 Diagnostic Diagnostic Click Management gt Diagnostic in the navigation panel to open this screen Use this screen to check system logs ping IP addresses or perform port tests Figure 183 Management Diagnostic ODE ToD Resolving 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192
209. ets are formatted according to the IEEE 802 3 standards A value of Ethernet II indicates that the packets are formatted according to RFC 894 Ethernet II encapsulation 178 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier Table 45 Advanced Application gt Classifier continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Layer 2 Specify th e fields below to configure a layer 2 classifier VLAN Select Any to classify traffic from any VLAN or select the second option and specify the source VLAN ID in the field provided When VLAN mapping is enabled this is the translated VLAN ID you set in the VLAN Mapping Configure screen If the incoming traffic is tagged and matches a VLAN mapping rule Priority Select Any to classify traffic from any priority level or select the second option and specify a priority level in the field provided Ethernet Type Select an Ethernet type or select Other and enter the Ethernet type number in hexadecimal value Refer to Table 47 on page 181 for information Source MAC Address Port Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses To specify a source select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Type the port number to which the rule should be applied You may choose one port only or all ports Any Destinatio n MAC Address Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC ad
210. fault HTTPS port on the Switch then in your browser enter https Switch IP Address as the web site address where Switch IP Address is the IP address or domain name of the Switch you wish to access 34 8 1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a Windows dialog box pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click View Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the Switch MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 323 Chapter 34 Access Control 34 8 2 You see the following Security Alert screen in Internet Explorer Select Yes to proceed to the web configurator login screen if you select No then web configurator access is blocked Figure 177 Security Alert Dialog Box Internet Explorer e A o amp Security Alert Information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed or changed by others However there is a problem with the site s security certificate The security certificate was issued by a company you have not chosen to trust View the certificate to determine whether you want to trust the certifying authority The security certificate date is valid The name on the security certificate is invalid or does not match the name of the site Do you want to proceed example No View Certificate x Netscape Navigator Warning Messages When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a Website Certified by an Unk
211. fic based on the packet s source MAC address Select dst mac to distribute traffic based on the packet s destination MAC address Select src dst mac to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination MAC addresses Select src ip to distribute traffic based on the packet s source IP address Select dst ip to distribute traffic based on the packet s destination IP address Select src dst ip to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination IP addresses Port This field displays the port number Group Select the trunk group to which a port belongs Note When you enable the port security feature on the Switch and configure port security settings for a port you cannot include the port in an active trunk group Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 17 5 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP to display the screen shown next See Section 17 2 on page 155 for more information on dynamic link ag
212. for incoming Set requests from the management station The Set Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Trap Enter the Trap Community string which is the password sent with Community each trap to the SNMP manager The Trap Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Trap Use this section to configure where to send SNMP traps from the Switch Destination Version Specify the version of the SNMP trap messages IP Enter the IP addresses of up to four managers to send your SNMP traps to Port Enter the port number upon which the manager listens for SNMP traps Username Enter the username to be sent to the SNMP manager along with the SNMP v3 trap Note This username must match an existing account on the Switch configured in Management gt Access Control gt Logins screen User Use this section to configure users for authentication with managers Information using SNMP v3 Note Use the username and password of the login accounts you specify in this section to create accounts on the SNMP v3 manager Index This is a read only number identifying a login account on the Switch Username This field displays the username of a login account on the Switch MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 34 Access Control Table 108 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Select whe
213. forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4 094 TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1Bit 12 bits 9 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames Each port on the Switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN unaware MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports but this can be changed A broadcast frame or a multicast frame for a multicast group that is known by the system is duplicated only on ports that are members of the VID except the ingress port itself thus confining t
214. found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital switch pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Taiwanese BSMI Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection A Warning EE ERRADAS Em EEA R ERG H GERIATR TOGST IBIN F FASS RES E EASE Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASS 1 PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040 10 AND 1040 11 PRODUIT CONFORME SELON 21 CFR 1040 10 ET 1040 11 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Appendix B Legal Information Viewing Certifi
215. g The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Advanced Application gt Mirroring LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate port mirroring on the Switch Clear this check box to disable the feature Monitor The monitor port is the port you copy the traffic to in order to examine it in Port more detail without interfering with the traffic flow on the original port s Enter the port number of the monitor port Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Mirrored Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port Direction Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror by selecting from the drop down list box Choices are Egress outgoing Ingress incoming and Both Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Link Aggregation This chapter shows you how to logically aggr
216. gainst the CIR Figure 152 TRTCM Color aware Mode 31 3 Activating DiffServ Activate DiffServ to apply marking rules or IEEE 802 1p priority mapping on the selected port s MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 31 Differentiated Services Click IP Application gt DiffServ in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 153 IP Application gt DiffServ Diftserv NN 2 rate 3 Color Marker DSCP Setting Active Vv Port Active i CO 1 Iv 2 rj 3 C 4 C 5 O 6 O 7 C 8 rj 9 rj 10 C 11 12 O Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 91 IP Application gt DiffServ LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable DiffServ on the Switch Port This field displays the index number of a port on the Switch 5 Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select Active to enable DiffServ on the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring C
217. gation panel Figure 100 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method Port 1 Method spa C WFO C WRR spa C wra C WRR spa C WFO C WRR spa C WFO C WRR spa C WFO C WRR spa C WFO C WRR spa C WFO C WRR SPQ C WFO C WRR spa C wra C WRR spa C WFO C WRR SPQ C WFO C WRR SPQ C WFQ C WRR Weight Q7 hn e Bb h b b F RB k b b hb Bb b F Fb h b b k 6 b F Rb hn b b h E b F RB h pb b hb b b F Pb hn P b h b b F Pb h P b hb b b F Pb h BR b h b b F RB h pb hb h b b F Pb h b b h b b FF Rb k b b k b Eb F RB f bp b hM b b Fr PB Hybrid SPQ Lowest Queue Mone v None None None None None v None None v None v None v None SEE Apply Cancel MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 22 Queuing Method The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 52 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This label shows the port you are configuring Method Select SPQ Strictly Priority Queuing WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing or WRR Weighted Round Robin SPQ services queues based on priority only When the highest priority queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue begins Q7 has the highest priority and QO the lowest WFQ is used to guarantee each queue s minimum bandwidth based on their bandwidth portion w
218. gher the priority level Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports LACP Active Select this option to enable LACP for a trunk Port This field displays the port number 3 Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them LACP Timeout is the time interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP Timeout packets in order to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up If a port does not respond after three tries then it is deemed to be down and is removed from the trunk Set a short timeout one second for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as soon as possible Select either 1 second or 30 seconds Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 6 Static Trunking Example This example shows you how to create a static port trunk group for ports 2 5 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide
219. gregation Figure 84 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol 4 Link Aggregation Setting Active 1 System Priority E5535 Group ID LACP Active T1 ales Li T3 O T4 1 T5 O T6 B Port LACP Timeout 30 j seconds 1 30 j seconds 2 30 seconds 3 30 gt seconds 4 30 j seconds 5 30 seconds RE up ure Ww we Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP LABEL DESCRIPTION pu Note Do not configure this screen unless you want to enable Control dynamic link aggregation Protocol Active Select this checkbox to enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation Table 40 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION System LACP system priority is a number between 1 and 65 535 The switch with Priority the lowest system priority and lowest port number if system priority is the same becomes the LACP server The LACP server controls the operation of LACP setup Enter a number to set the priority of an active port using Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP The smaller the number the hi
220. gs take effect MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide PART Il Basic Configuration The Web Configurator 57 Initial Setup Example 67 System Status and Port Statistics 73 Basic Setting 79 The Web Configurator This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator 5 1 Introduction The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy Switch setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 JavaScript enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default 5 2 System Login Start your web browser Type http and the IP address of the Switch the default management IP address is 192 168 1 1 through an in band non MGMT port and 192 168 0 1 through the MGMT port in the Location or Address field Press ENTER MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 5 The Web Configurator 3 The login screen appears The default username is admin and associated default password is 1234 The date and time display as shown if you have not configured a time server nor manually entered a time and date in the General Setup screen Figure 32 Web Conf
221. he remote streaming media server S Computers A B and C in VLAN are able to receive the traffic Figure 113 MVR Configuration Example un E I mj L ue g A eee eee eee To configure the MVR settings on the Switch create a multicast group in the MVR screen and set the receiver and source ports Figure 114 MVR Configuration Example Multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority Mode Port Source Port c OLD Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active Vv Name Premium Tagging MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast To set the Switch to forward the multicast group traffic to the subscribers configure multicast group settings in the Group Configuration screen The following figure shows an example where two multicast groups News and Movie are configured for the multicast VLAN 200 Figure 115 MVR Group Configuration Example Group Configuration P Multicast VLAN ID 200 lt pum Name Start Address End Address Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All 200 News 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 C Delete Group Figure 116 MVR Group Configuration Example Group Configuration MVR Multicast VLAN ID 200 Name Start Address End Address o 0 0 0 fo 0 0 0 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All 200 r1
222. he broadcast to a specific domain 9 2 Automatic VLAN Registration GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches 9 2 1 GARP GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol allows network switches to register and de register attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN GARP is a protocol that provides a generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific application for example GVRP 9 2 1 1 GARP Timers Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values 9 2 2 GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Enable this function to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch Please refer to the following table for common IEEE 802 1Q VLAN terminology Table 13 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Terminology VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Permanent VLAN This is a static VLAN created manually Dynamic VLAN This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration deregistration process MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Table 13 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Terminology continued Administrative Contro
223. hy the Switch does not respond to HTTP can see the Login screen but cannot log in to the Switch 1 Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly The default user name is admin and the default password is 1234 These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 2 You may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions Close other Telnet session s or try connecting again later Check that you have enabled logins for HTTP or telnet If you have configured a secured client IP address your computer s IP address must match it Refer to the chapter on access control for details 3 Turn the Switch off and on 4 Disconnect and re connect the cord to the Switch 5 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 5 6 on page 63 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 355 Chapter 41 Troubleshooting Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device JavaScripts enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default cannot see some of Advanced Application submenus at the bottom of the navigation panel The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels Adjust the value in your computer and then you should see the rest of Advanced Application submenus at the bottom of the navigation panel The
224. ial In User Service see Section 25 1 2 on page 222 and TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus see Section MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 221 Chapter 25 AAA 25 1 1 25 1 2 25 1 2 on page 222 as external authentication authorization and accounting servers Figure 117 AAA Server E Client AAA Server Local User Accounts By storing user profiles locally on the Switch your Switch is able to authenticate and authorize users without interacting with a network AAA server However there is a limit on the number of users you may authenticate in this way See Chapter 33 on page 297 RADIUS and TACACS RADIUS and TACACS are security protocols used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of or in addition to an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device In essence RADIUS and TACACS authentication both allow you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central location The following table describes some key differences between RADIUS and TACACS Table 65 RADIUS vs TACACS RADIUS TACACS Transport UDP User Datagram Protocol TCP Transmission Control Protocol Protocol Encryption Encrypts the password sent for All communication between the client authentication the Switch and the TACACS server is encrypted 25 2 AAA Screens The AAA screens allow you to enable authenti
225. iew Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one Switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another Table 117 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications Maximum number of cluster 24 members Cluster Member Models Must be compatible with ZyXEL cluster management implementation Cluster Manager The switch through which you manage the cluster member switches Cluster Members The switches being managed by the cluster manager switch MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 335 Chapter 37 Cluster Management In the following example switch A in the basement is the cluster manager and the other switches on the upper floors of the building are cluster members Figure 186 Clustering Application Example x 37 2 Cluster Management Status Click Management gt Cluster Management in the navigation panel to display the following screen Note A cluster can only have one manager Figure 187 Management Cluster Management Status a lustering Management Status Configuration Status Manager Manager 00 13 49 00 00 02 The Number Of Member 1 Index MacAddr Name Model Status 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 GS 2024 Online MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 37 Cluster Management The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 118 Management gt
226. igher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All Switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if yo
227. iguration files Click Management gt Maintenance in the navigation panel to open the following screen Figure 163 Management gt Maintenance c OAMENI Current Configuration 1 Firmware Upgrade Click Here Restore Configuration Click Here Backup Configuration Click Here Load Factory Defautt Click Here Save Configuration Config 1 Config 2 Reboot System Config 1 Config 2 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 99 Management gt Maintenance LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This field displays which configuration Configuration 1 or Configuration 2 is currently operating on the Switch Firmware Click Click Here to go to the Firmware Upgrade screen Upgrade Restore Click Click Here to go to the Restore Configuration screen Configuratio n Backup Click Click Here to go to the Backup Configuration screen Configuratio n MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 297 Chapter 33 Maintenance 33 2 Table 99 Management gt Maintenance continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Load Click Click Here to reset the configuration to the factory default settings Factory Default Save Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration Configuratio 1 on the Switch n Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch Reboot Click Config 1 to reboot the system and load Configuration 1
228. igurator Login qe Please type your user name and password Site 182 168 1 1 Realm MGS 3712F at Thu Jan 1 00 05 30 1970 User Name Password Savethis password in your password list omen 4 Click OK to view the first web configurator screen 5 3 The Status Screen The Status screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator The following figure shows the navigating components of a web configurator screen Figure 33 Web Configurator Home Screen Status IG Save Statu El Logou B Help nns Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts Down STOP Disabled 0 Down STOP Disabled Down STOP Disabled Down STOP Disabled Down STOP Disabled Down STOP Disabled Down STOP Disabled Down STOP Disabled Down STOP Disabled Down STOP Disabled Down STOP Disabled Down STOP Disabled Clear Counter Management ko o dc jc d w d d Ble ooo oo oC oO oD oO oO oio ja m A Click the menu items to open submenu links and then click on a submenu link to open the screen in the main window MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 5 The Web Configurator B C D E These are quick links which allow you to perform certain tasks no matter which screen you are currently working in B Click this link to save your configuration into the Switch s nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory is the configuration of your Switch that stays the same even if the Switch s po
229. ike Protocol This is the type of IP protocol used by the service If this is TCP UDP then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP If this is User Defined the Port s is the IP protocol number not the port number Port s This value depends on the Protocol Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers f the Protocol is TCP UDP or TCP UDP this is the IP port number f the Protocol is USER this is the IP protocol number Description This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used Table 128 Commonly Used Services NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION AH User Defined 51 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header IPSEC TUNNEL tunneling protocol uses this service AIM New I CQ TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service It is also used as a listening port by ICQ AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client BOOTP SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software UDP 24032 DNS TCP UDP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names for example www zyxel com to IP numbers MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 367 Appendix A Common Services Table 128 Commonly Used Services continued
230. ilter afterwards Enter 0 if you want the MAC address filter to be permanent Log Profile Log buffer size Enter the maximum number 1 1024 of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and have not been sent to the syslog server yet Make sure this number is appropriate for the specified Syslog rate and Log interval If the number of log messages in the Switch exceeds this number the Switch stops recording log messages and simply starts counting the number of entries that were dropped due to unavailable buffer Click Clearing log status table in the ARP Inspection Log Status screen to clear the log and reset this counter See Section 26 6 2 on page 253 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 255 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 83 ARP Inspection Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog rate Enter the maximum number of syslog messages the Switch can send to the syslog server in one batch This number is expressed as a rate because the batch frequency is determined by the Log I nterval You must configure the syslog server Chapter 36 on page 331 to use this Enter O if you do not want the Switch to send log messages generated by ARP packets to the syslog server The relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval is illustrated in the following examples e 4 invalid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log interval is 1 the Switch sends 4 syslog messages every second 6 inv
231. in this screen to their last saved values Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for DHCP snooping Note If DHCP is enabled and there are no trusted ports DHCP requests will not succeed You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port trusted or untrusted can receive each second To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt Port Figure 128 DHCP Snooping Port Configure DHCF Snooping Fort Configure Server Trusted state Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted v Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Configure Rate pps Apply Cancel MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 78 DHCP Snooping Port Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number If you configure the port the settings are applied to all of the ports Server Trusted state Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches and the Switch discards DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers
232. in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network The Switch uses IEEE 802 1w RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol that allows faster convergence of the spanning tree than STP while also being backwards compatible with STP only aware bridges In RSTP topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from the device that generates the topology change In STP a longer delay is required as the device that causes a topology change first notifies the root bridge that then notifies the network Both RSTP and STP flush unwanted learned addresses from the filtering database In RSTP the port states are Discarding Learning and Forwarding Note In this user s guide STP refers to both STP and RSTP 13 1 1 STP Terminology The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 125 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 1 2 Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port The recommended cost is assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached The slower the media the higher the cost Table 24 STP Path Costs LINK RECOMMENDED RECOMMENDED ALLOWED SPEED VALUE RANGE RANGE Path 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 65535 Cost Path 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 1 to 65535 Cost Path 16Mbps 62 40 to 400 1 to 65535 Cost Path 100Mbps 19 10 to 60 1 to 65535 Cost Path 1Gbps 4 3 to 10 1 to 65535
233. inding the MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard new static binding replaces the original one To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt Static Binding Figure 125 IP Source Guard Static Binding IP Source Guard Static Binding IPSG MAC Address IP Address VLAN e Any Add Cancel Clear Index MAC Address IP Address Lease Type VLAN Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 75 IP Source Guard Static Binding LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Enter the source MAC address in the binding P Address Enter the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding VLAN Enter the source VLAN ID in the binding Port Specify the port s in the binding If this binding has one port select the first radio button and enter the port number in the field to the right If this binding applies to all ports select Any Add Click this to create the specified static binding or to update an existing one Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected static binding or if not applicable to clear the fields above Clear Click this to clear the fields above Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the
234. ing System sometimes referred to as the ras file is the system firmware and has a bin filename extension Table 100 Filename Conventions INTERNA EXTERNA L NAME L NAME DESCRIPTION Configuration config cfg This is the configuration filename on the File Switch Uploading the config file replaces the specified configuration file system including your Switch configurations system related data including the default password the error log and the trace log FILE TYPE Firmware ras bin This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the Switch Example FTP Commands ftp gt put firmware bin ras This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file firmware bin to the Switch ftp gt get config config cfg This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to a file called config cfg on your computer If your T FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source you will need to rename them as the Switch only recognizes config and ras Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device 33 8 2 FTP Command Line Procedure ok N A c Launch the FTP client on your computer Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your Switch Press ENTER when prompt
235. instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your TACACS accounting settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the TACACS server Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS accounting server entry P Address Enter the I P address of an external TACACS accounting server in dotted decimal notation TCP Port The default port of a TACACS server for accounting is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do SO MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Table 67 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server
236. ion gt Port Security continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the port security feature on this port The Switch forwards packets whose MAC address es is in the MAC address table on this port Packets with no matching MAC address es are dropped Clear this check box to disable the port security feature The Switch forwards all packets on this port Address Learning Limited Number of Learned MAC Address MAC address learning reduces outgoing broadcast traffic For MAC address learning to occur on a port the port itself must be active with address learning enabled Use this field to limit the number of dynamic MAC addresses that may be learned on a port For example if you set this field to 5 on port 2 then only the devices with these five learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time A sixth device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses aged out MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen The valid range is from 0 to 16384 0 means this feature is disabled Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Sw
237. ion Id Y Y Y Acct Status Type Y Y Y Acct Delay Time Y Y Y MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 233 Chapter 25 AAA 25 3 2 3 Table 72 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Telnet SSH ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP Acct Session ld Y Y Y Acct Authentic Y Y Y Acct Session Time Y Y Acct Terminate Cause Y Attributes Used for Accounting IEEE 802 1x Events The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time of the session they are sent Table 73 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via 802 1x ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name lt lt NAS IP Address NAS Port Class Called Station Id Calling Station Id NAS I dentifier NAS Port Type Acct Status Type Acct Delay Time Acct Session ld Acct Authentic lt lt x x x x x x A Acct Input Octets Acct Output Octets Acct Session Time Acct I nput Packets Acct Output Packets lt lt lt x lt lt x lt lt x lt x x lt lt Acct Terminate Cause Acct Input Gigawords Acct Output Gigawords lt lt x x lt x lt x x x x xi xIx ARI A MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide IP Source Guard Use IP source guard to filter unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network 26 1 IP Source Guard Overview IP sour
238. iority 32768 Hello Time b Seconds MAX Age po Seconds Forwarding Delay fis Seconds Port Active Priority Path Cost z 1 r 28 RN 2 28 p 3 r 28 RN 4 D h M 5 f NN 6 r h 7 h NEN 8 n 128 NN 2 m m NEN 10 n 128 RN 11 r ha TN 12 n 1 RN Ti Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the RSTP Status screen see Figure 74 on page 135 Active Select this check box to activate RSTP Clear this checkbox to disable RSTP Note You must also activate Rapid Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable RSTP on the Switch MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 133 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 27 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge
239. iority over lower layer rule Figure 95 Advanced Application gt Classifier Summary Table Index Active Name Rule Delete 3 Yes Example EtherType IP SrcMac 00 50 ba ad 4f81 SrcPort port 2 O Delete Cancel MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Classifier Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to edit the rule Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purpose only Rule This field displays a summary of the classifier rule s settings Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes The following table shows some other common Ethernet types and the corresponding protocol number Table 47 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Numbers ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER IP ETHII 0800 X 75 Internet 0801 NBS Internet 0802 ECMA Internet 0803 Chaosnet 0804 X 25 Level 3 0805 XNS Compat 0807 Banyan Systems OBAD BBN Simnet 5208 IBM SNA 80D5 AppleTalk AARP 80F3 In the Internet Protocol there is a field called Protocol to identify the next level protocol
240. iple servers at a single location Figure 2 Bridging Application SN Internet 3 m Sales Sm m Seen ee mmm MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 1 1 3 High Performance Switching Example The Switch is ideal for connecting two networks that need high bandwidth In the following example use trunking to connect these two networks Switching to higher speed LANs such as ATM Asynchronous Transmission Mode is not feasible for most people due to the expense of replacing all existing Ethernet cables and adapter cards restructuring your network and complex maintenance The Switch can provide the same bandwidth as ATM at much lower cost while still being able to use existing adapters and switches Moreover the current LAN structure can be retained as all ports can freely communicate with each other Figure 3 High Performance Switched Workgroup Application ee eee ee m 1 1 4 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Application Examples A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Stations on a logical network belong to one group A station can belong to more than one group With VLAN a station cannot directly talk to or hear from stations that are not in the same group s unless such traffic first goes through a router For more information on VLANs refer to Chapter 9 on page 95 1 1 4
241. ir one wire for the positive terminal and one wire for the negative terminal Note The current rating of the power wires must be greater than 20 Amps The power supply to which the Switch connects must have a built in circuit breaker or switch to toggle the power Note When installing the power wire push it wire firmly into the terminal as deep as possible and make sure that no exposed bare wire can be seen or touched Exposed power wire is dangerous Use extreme care when connecting a DC power source to the device To connect a power supply 1 Use a screwdriver to loosen the terminal block captive screws 2 Connect one end of a power wire to the Switch s RTN return pin and tighten the captive screw 3 Connect the other end of the power wire to the positive terminal on the power supply 4 Connect one end of a power wire to the Switch s 48V input pin and tighten the captive screw 5 Connect the other end of the power wire to the negative terminal on the power supply 6 Insert the terminal block plug in the Switch s terminal block header MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 1 6 Signal Slot 3 1 6 1 The Signal slot fitted with the signal connector allows you to connect devices to the Switch such as sensors or other ZyXEL switches which support the external alarm feature This feature is in addition to the system alarm which detects abnormal temperatures voltage levels an
242. iscarded Enable this feature to reduce broadcast multicast and or DLF packets in your network You can specify limits for each packet type on each port Click Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 80 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control D Broadcast Storm Control g Active C Port Broadcast pkt s Multicast pkt s DLF pkt s r St r i r E 2 mem UNI cm NANI A D um V e D Le DUBBI UBRO BE CB She Bh NEC mmn ND ae m iB NUN a m Ac EES AVR AU UCM S Apply Cancel MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 15 Broadcast Storm Control The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable traffic storm control on the Switch Clear this check box to disable this feature Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Broadcast Select this option and specify how many broadcast packets the port pkt s receives per second Multicast pkt s Select this option and specif
243. isplay the next screen Figure 34 Change Administrator Login Password aC Administrator Access Control Pid Password New Password Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Edit Logins Login User Name Password Retype to confirm pulos S ee eres ee eee actin 4 Apply Cancel 5 4 Saving Your Configuration When you are done modifying the settings in a screen click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off Click the Save link in the upper right hand corner of the web configurator to save your configuration to nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory refers to the Switch s storage that remains even if the Switch s power is turned off Note Use the Save link when you are done with a configuration session 5 5 Switch Lockout You could block yourself and all others from using in band management managing through the data ports if you do one of the following 1 Delete the management VLAN default is VLAN 1 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 5 The Web Configurator 2 Delete all port based VLANs with the CPU port as a member The CPU port is the management port of the Switch 3 Filter all traffic to the CPU port 4 Disable all ports 5 Misconfigure the text configura
244. itch A on any other port In other words loop guard also protects against standard network loops The following figure illustrates three switches forming a loop A sample path of the loop guard probe packet is also shown In this example the probe packet is sent from port N and returns on another port As long as loop guard is enabled on MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 27 Loop Guard port N The Switch will shut down port N if it detects that the probe packet has returned to the Switch Figure 139 Loop Guard Network Loop Note After resolving the loop problem on your network you can re activate the disabled port via the web configurator see Section 8 7 on page 91 or via commands See the CLI Reference Guide 27 2 Loop Guard Setup Click Advanced Application gt Loop Guard in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Note The loop guard feature can not be enabled on the ports that have Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP MRSTP or MSTP enabled Figure 140 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard Loop Guard Active r1 Port Active si ri 1 O 2 r1 3 O 4 O 5 mi 6 a 7 O 8 ri 9 ri 10 a 11 O 12 m Apply Cancel MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 27 Loop Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 86 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Ac
245. itch can also be managed via Telnet any terminal emulator program on the console port or third party SNMP management This section shows a few examples of using the Switch in various network environments See Chapter 42 on page 357 for a full list of software features available on the Switch 1 1 1 Backbone Application The Switch is an ideal solution for small networks where rapid growth can be expected in the near future The Switch can be used standalone for a group of heavy traffic users You can connect computers and servers directly to the Switch s port or connect other switches to the Switch MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 23 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch In this example all computers can share high speed applications on the server To expand the network simply add more networking devices such as switches routers computers print servers etc Figure 1 Backbone Application 1 1 2 Bridging Example In this example application the Switch connects different company departments RD and Sales to the corporate backbone It can alleviate bandwidth contention and eliminate server and network bottlenecks All users that need high bandwidth can connect to high speed department servers via the Switch You can provide a super fast uplink connection by using a Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC port on the Switch Moreover the Switch eases supervision and maintenance by allowing network managers to centralize mult
246. itch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 173 Chapter 19 Port Security 19 3 VLAN MAC Address Limit Use this screen to set the MAC address learning limit on per port and per VLAN basis Click VLAN MAC Address Limit in the Advanced Application gt Port Security screen to display the screen as shown Figure 93 Advanced Application gt Port Security gt VLAN MAC Address Limit CE VEAN MAC Address Limit Active Port VID Limit Number Index Port Security r p T T Add Cancel Clear Active Port VID Limit Number Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 44 Advanced Application gt Port Security gt VLAN MAC Address Limit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Port Select this option to activate this rule Enter the number of the port to which this rule is applied VID Enter the VLAN identification number Limit Number Use this field to limit the number of dynamic MAC addresses that may be learned on a port in a specified VLAN For example if you set this field to 5 on port 2 then only the devices with these five learned MAC addresses may acc
247. ity No change C Setthe packet s 802 1 priority C Send the packet to priority queue C Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value Diffserv No change C Setthe packet s TOS field C Replace the IP TOS field with the 802 1 priority value Setthe Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Outgoing Sendthe packetto the mirror port Sendthe packetto the egress port Metering Enable Drop the packet Out of profile Change the DSCP value action Set Out Drop Precedence Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Add Cancel Clear The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 50 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable the policy Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 187 Chapter 21 Policy Rule 188 Table 50 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Classifier s This field displays the active classifier s you configure in the Classifier screen Select the classifier s to which this policy rule applies To select more than one classifier press SHIFT and select the choices at the same time Parameters Set the fields below for this policy You only have to set the field s that is related to the action s you configure in the Action field
248. l VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION VLAN Registration Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members Registration Forbidden Ports with registration forbidden are forbidden to join the specified VLAN Normal Registration Ports dynamically join a VLAN using GVRP VLAN Tag Control Tagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing frames transmitted Untagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN don t tag all outgoing frames transmitted VLAN Port Port VID This is the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames that this port received Acceptable Frame Type You may choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames just tagged incoming frames or just untagged incoming frames ona port Ingress filtering If set the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not have this port as a member 9 3 Port VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through that port This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices Refer to the following figure Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 V1 and V2 on devices A and B Without VLAN Trunking you must configure VLAN groups 1 and 2 on all intermediary switches C D and E otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags However with VLAN Trunking en
249. lect color blind to have the Switch treat all incoming packets as uncolored All incoming packets are evaluated against the CIR and PIR Select color aware to treat the packets as marked by some preceding entity Incoming packets are evaluated based on their existing color Incoming packets that are not marked proceed through the Switch MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 31 Differentiated Services Table 92 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the index number of a port on the Switch i Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this to activate TRTCM on the port Commit Specify the Commit Information Rate CIR for this port Rate Peak Rate Specify the Peak Information Rate PIR for this port DSCP Use this section to specify the DSCP values that you want to assign to packets based on the color they are marked via TRTCM green Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with low packet loss priority yellow Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with medium packet loss priority red Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with high packet loss
250. led writes Database detail Description Status First successful access None Last ignored bindings counters Binding collisions Invalid interfaces Parse failures Expired leases Unsupported vlans Lastignored time None oo co oo co Total ignored bindings counters Binding collisions Invalid interfaces Parse failures Expired leases Unsupported vlans oo coos MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 76 DHCP Snooping LABEL DESCRIPTION Database Status This section displays the current settings for the DHCP snooping database You can configure them in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 26 5 on page 246 Agent URL This field displays the location of the DHCP snooping database Write delay timer This field displays how long in seconds the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up Abort timer This field displays how long in seconds the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping database after the current bindings change This section displays information about the current update and the next update of the DHCP snooping database Agent running This field displays the status of the current update or access of the DHCP snooping database none The Switch is not accessing the DHCP snooping database read The S
251. lidates access to a port based on a username and password provided by the user MAC An authentication server validates access to a port based on the MAC address and password of the client Both types of authentication use the RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 protocol to validate users See Section 25 1 2 on page 222 for more information on configuring your RADIUS server settings Note If you enable IEEE 802 1x authentication and MAC authentication on the same port the Switch performs IEEE 802 1x authentication first If a user fails to authenticate via the IEEE 802 1x method then access to the port is denied IEEE 802 1x Authentication The following figure illustrates how a client connecting to a IEEE 802 1x authentication enabled port goes through a validation process The Switch prompts the client for login information in the form of a user name and password When the client provides the login credentials the Switch sends an authentication 2 Atthe time of writing IEEE 802 1x is not supported by all operating systems See your operating system documentation If your operating system does not support 802 1x then you may need to install 802 1x client software MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication request to a RADIUS server The RADIUS server validates whether this client is allowed access to the port Figure 87 IEEE 802 1x Authentication Process S
252. lobal if the Switch is configured as a DHCP relay agent only VLAN followed by a VLAN ID if it is configured as a relay agent for specific VLAN s 32 3 DHCP Relay 32 3 1 Configure DHCP relay on the Switch if the DHCP clients and the DHCP server are not in the same broadcast domain During the initial IP address leasing the Switch helps to relay network information such as the IP address and subnet mask between a DHCP client and a DHCP server Once the DHCP client obtains an P address and can connect to the network network information renewal is done between the DHCP client and the DHCP server without the help of the Switch The Switch can be configured as a global DHCP relay This means that the Switch forwards all DHCP requests from all domains to the same DHCP server You can also configure the Switch to relay DHCP information based on the VLAN membership of the DHCP clients DHCP Relay Agent Information The Switch can add information about the source of client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server by adding Relay Agent I nformation This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests The DHCP server can then provide an IP address based on this information Please refer to RFC 3046 for more details 288 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 32 DHCP 32 3 2 The DHCP Relay Agent Information feature adds an Agent Information field to the Option 82 field The Option 82 field is
253. longing to this subnet based VLAN Delete Click this to delete the subnet based VLANs which you marked for deletion Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 9 8 Protocol Based VLANs Protocol based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the protocol you specify When an upstream frame is received on a port configured for a protocol based VLAN the Switch checks if a tag is added already and its protocol The untagged packets of the same protocol are then placed in the same protocol based VLAN One advantage of using protocol based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to traffic of the same protocol Note Protocol based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN For example port 1 2 3 and 4 belong to static VLAN 100 and port 4 5 6 7 belong to static VLAN 120 You configure a protocol based VLAN A with priority 3 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 107 Chapter 9 VLAN for ARP traffic received on port 1 2 and 3 You also have a protocol based VLAN B with priority 2 for Apple Talk traffic received on port 6 and 7 All upstream ARP traffic from port 1 2 and 3 will be grouped together and all upstream Apple Talk traffic from port 6 and 7 will be in another group and have higher priority than ARP traffic when they go through the uplink port to a backbone switch C Figure 55 Protocol Based VLAN Application Example 9 9 Co
254. ly to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 4 Introduction to VLANs A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router In MTU Multi Tenant Unit applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain Note VLAN is unidirectional it only governs outgoing traffic See Chapter 9 on page 95 for information on port based and 802 1Q tagged VLANs
255. manager Type Select the categories of SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP manager Options Select the individual SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP station See Section 34 3 3 on page 308 for individual trap descriptions The traps are grouped by category Selecting a category automatically selects all of the category s traps Clear the check boxes for individual traps that you do not want the Switch to send to the SNMP station Clearing a category s check box automatically clears all of the category s trap check boxes the Switch only sends traps from selected categories Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 34 Access Control 34 3 6 Setting Up Login Accounts Up to five people one administrator and four non administrators may access the Switch via web configurator at any one time An administrator is someone who can both view and configure Switch changes The username for the Administrator is always admin The default administrator password is 1234 Note It is highly recommended that you change the default administrator password
256. mation on Virtual LAN 23 1 VLAN Stacking Overview A service provider can use VLAN stacking also known as Q in Q to allow it to distinguish multiple customers VLANs even those with the same customer assigned VLAN ID within its network Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames that enter the network By tagging the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANSs This allows a service provider to provide different service based on specific VLANs for many different customers A service provider s customers may require a range of VLANs to handle multiple applications A service provider s customers can assign their own inner VLAN tags on ports for these applications The service provider can assign an outer VLAN tag for each customer Therefore there is no VLAN tag overlap among customers so traffic from different customers is kept separate 23 1 1 VLAN Stacking Example In the following example figure both A and B are Service Provider s Network SPN customers with VPN tunnels between their head offices and branch offices respectively Both have an identical VLAN tag for their VLAN group The service provider can separate these two VLANs within its network by adding tag 37 to MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 197 Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking distinguish customer A and tag 48 to distingui
257. maximum Interfaces MGS 3712F 8 mini GBIC SFP slots MGS 3712 8 100 1000 Base Tx ports All Models 4 GbE Dual Personality interfaces Each interface has one 1000Base T RJ 45 port and one Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP slot with one port active at a time One local management 100Base T RJ 45 port Auto negotiation Auto MDIX One console port Compliant with IEEE 802 3ad u x Back pressure flow control for half duplex Flow control for full duplex IEEE 802 3x LEDs Per switch BPS PWR SYS ALM Per 1000BASE T RJ 45 port Mini GBIC slot 100 1000 LNK ACT Per mini GBIC slot LNK ACT Per Management port 10 100 Operating Temperature 09 C 659 C 329 F 149 F Ene Humidity 10 90 non condensing MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 357 Chapter 42 Product Specifications Table 124 Hardware Specifications Storage Environment Temperature 109C 709C 14 F 1582F Humidity 10 9096 non condensing Ground Wire Gauge 18 AWG or larger Power Wire Gauge 18 AWG or larger Fuse Specification 250 VAC T2A External Signal Jack Supports input from four external alarms or other devices and output to one device External Signal connector nput connect any one of the input pin pairs 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 to a normally open NO dry contact device without any external input power An alarm is triggered when the circuit is closed Output dry contact support
258. me Type VLAN Trunking isolation x LE du Al E ri 1 MM m AM Al M r 2 a ie Al Z r m 3 I 10 31 7 EB Al m 4 ri Ei Al E Im 5 O Al E C C 6 O Al x O ri 7 rH Al amp O C 8 n Al x n ri 9 rj B Al m r 10 D amem NE Al Dr rj gcc RS C c M ee ee eee ee Oe ona ow Rl Apply Cancel 4 Goto Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP snooping gt Configure activate and specify VLAN 100 as the DHCP VLAN as shown Click Apply VLAN DHCP Snoopin Vv ee C Disable vi joo Database Agent URL Timeout interval 06 seconds Write delay interval son seconds Renew DHCP Snooping URL _Renew Apply Cancel MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials lick the Port link at the t ight 5 Click the Port link at the top right corner D VLAN DHCP Snooping 6 The DHCP Snooping Port Configure screen appears Select Trusted in the Server Trusted state field for port 5 because the DHCP server is connected to port 5 Keep ports 6 and 7 Untrusted because they are connected to DHCP clients Click Apply Figure 23 Tutorial Set the DHCP Server Port to Trusted E DHCP Snooping Port Configure g Configure Port Server Trusted state Rate pps 4 pi 5 b 6 p 7 a p 7 Goto Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP snooping gt Configure gt VLAN show VLAN 100 by entering 100 in the Start VI D and En
259. me for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate RSTP on this port Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 24 on page 126 for more information MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 27 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navig
260. mit or VLAN ID assigned via the external server MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Table 68 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to activate authorization for a specified event types Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS for authorization of specific types of events RADIUS is the only method for IEEE 802 1x authorization Accounting Use this section to configure accounting settings on the Switch Update Period This is the amount of time in minutes before the Switch sends an update to the accounting server This is only valid if you select the start stop option for the Exec or Dot1x entries Type The Switch supports the following types of events to be sent to the accounting server s System Configure the Switch to send information when the following system events occur system boots up system shuts down system accounting is enabled system accounting Is disabled Exec Configure the Switch to send information when an administrator logs in and logs out via the console port telnet or SSH e Dot1x Configure the Switch to send information when an IEEE 802 1x client begins a session authenticates via the Switch ends a session as well as interim updates of a session Commands Configure the Switch to send information when Eae of specified privilege level and higher are executed on the witch
261. momom ato A r or Per z 4 E 1000100 auto z Tr oz Peer vl 5 m tonoorooom ato s Lr Oy Pe 6 m tonoonooom Ato A Tr 0r Peer v 7 m nono Ato A r oz Peer 8 m wot auto Lr or Pe gt 9 m tonoonooom ato r os Per 10 i moomoo Auto 7 joz Per z uoe f momom at A Lr or Pee z 12 V oono auto xz Lr Oy Pe zl Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Basic Setting gt Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the port index number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable a port The factory default for all ports is enabled A port must be enabled for data transmission to occur Name Enter a descriptive name that identifies this port You can enter up to 64 alpha numerical characters Note Due to space limitation the port name may be truncated in some web configurator screens Type This field displays 10 100 1000M for Gigabit connections MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 12 Basic Setting gt Port Setup continued LABEL D
262. n gt Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 72 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration Spanning Tree Configuration Status Rapid Spanning Tree Spanning Tree Mode C Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree C Multiple Spanning Tree Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 26 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Spanning Tree You can activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Mode Select Rapid Spanning Tree Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree or Multiple Spanning Tree See Section 13 1 on page 125 for background information on STP Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 132 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Use this screen to configure RSTP settings see Section 13 1 on page 125 for more information on RSTP Click RSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen Figure 73 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP OLE Spanning Tree Protocol eng Status Active E Bridge Pr
263. n make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Role Select Normal to have the switch ignore frames received or transmitted on this port with VLAN stacking tags Anything you configure in SPVID and Priority of the Port based QinQ or the Selective QinQ screen are ignored Select Access Port for ingress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Select Tunnel Port available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Select Tunnel Port to have the Switch add the Tunnel TPID tag to all outgoing frames sent on this port In order to support VLAN stacking on a port the port must be able to allow frames of 1526 Bytes 1522 Bytes 4 Bytes for the second tag to pass through it Tunnel TPID is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates TPID whether the frame carries IEEE 802 1Q tag information Enter a four digit hexadecimal number from 0000 to FFFF that the Switch adds in the outer VLAN tag of the frames sent on the tunnel port s The Switch also uses this to check if the received frames are double tagged The value of this field is 0x8100 as defined in IEEE 802 1Q If the Switch needs to communicate with other vendors devices they should use the same TPID Note You can define up to four different tunnel TPIDs including 8100 in this screen at a time Apply Click Apply
264. n the Switch Calling Station Id Frame MTU EAP Message State Message Authenticator 232 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA 25 3 2 Attributes Used for Accounting The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing authentication 25 3 2 1 Attributes Used for Accounting System Events NAS P Address NAS Identifier Acct Status Type Acct Session ID The format of Acct Session Id is date time 8 digit sequential number for example 2007041917210300000001 date 2007 04 19 time 17 21 03 serial number 00000001 Acct Delay Time 25 3 2 2 Attributes Used for Accounting Exec Events The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time that they are sent the difference between Console and Telnet SSH Exec events is that the Telnet SSH events utilize the Calling Station Id attribute Table 71 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name Y Y Y NAS Identifier Y Y Y NAS IP Address Y Y Y Service Type Y Y Y Acct Status Type Y Y Y Acct Delay Time Y Y Y Acct Session Id Y Y Y Acct Authentic Y Y Y Acct Session Time Y Y Acct Terminate Cause Y Table 72 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Telnet SSH ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name Y Y Y NAS Identifier Y Y Y NAS P Address Y Y Y Service Type Y Y Y Calling Stat
265. nQ continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the number of the selective VLAN stacking rule Active This shows whether this rule is activated or not Name This is the descriptive name for this rule Port This is the port number to which this rule is applied VID This is the customer VLAN ID in the incoming packets SPVID This is the service provider s VLAN ID that adds to the packets from the subscribers Priority This is the service provider s priority level in the packets Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 24 1 24 1 1 24 1 2 Multicast This chapter shows you how to configure various multicast features Multicast Overview Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender to 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender to everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data Refer to RFC 1112 RFC 2236 and RFC 3376 for information on IGMP versions 1 2 and 3 respectively IP Multicast Addresses In IPv4 a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts multicast group in a different subnet
266. ne the classifiers After you define the classifier you can specify actions or policy to act upon the traffic that matches the rules To configure policy rules refer to Chapter 21 on page 185 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 177 Chapter 20 Classifier Click Advanced Application gt Classifier in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 94 Advanced Application gt Classifier Active Name Layer 2 Layer 3 amp Classifier ng r m VLAN Priority Ethernet Type Source Destination DSCP IP Protocol Source Destination Packet Format All Any ot Any c fox C others l t MAC Address Any ome E EHE ARE E E Any Port a i MAC Address any wc D EC SEC REC I Any Cc H c Al I Establish Only Cones mea IP Address a Address Prefix 0 0 0 0 G Any Socket Number E IP Address Address Prefix joo Socket Number of Add Cancel Clear The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 Advanced Application gt Classifier LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Name Select this option to enable this rule Enter a descriptive name for this rule for identifying purposes Packet Format Specify the format of the packet Choices are All 802 3 tagged 802 3 untagged Ethernet II tagged and Ethernet II untagged A value of 802 3 indicates that the pack
267. nently 4 2 3 Configuring DHCP Relay Follow the steps below to enable DHCP relay on the Switch and allow the Switch to add relay agent information such as the VLAN ID to DHCP requests 1 Click IP Application gt DHCP and then the Global link to open the DHCP Relay screen 2 Select the Active check box 3 Enter the DHCP server s IP address 192 168 2 3 in this example in the Remote DHCP Server 1 field 4 Select the Option 82 and the Information check boxes MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 53 Chapter 4 Tutorials 5 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Figure 31 Tutorial Set DHCP Server and Relay Information ED DHCP Relay Status Active Vv Remote DHCP Server 1 2168823 Remote DHCP Server2 0000 Remote DHCP Server 3 ooo Relay Agent Information Iv Option 82 Information v MES 3728 Apply Cancel 6 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently 7 The DHCP server can then assign a specific IP address based on the DHCP request 4 2 4 Troubleshooting Check the client A s IP address If it did not receive the IP address 172 16 1 18 make sure 1 Client A is connected to the Switch s port 2 in VLAN 102 2 You configured the correct VLAN ID port number and system name for DHCP relay on both the DHCP server and the Switch 3 You clicked the Save link on the Switch to have your settin
268. nfiguration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VID This is the VLAN ID and is only applicable if the Switch is set to 802 1Q VLAN All switches must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same cluster Switches that are not in the same VLAN group are not visible in the Clustering Candidates list This field is ignored if the Clustering Manager is using Port based VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clustering The following fields relate to the switches that are potential cluster Candidate members List A list of suitable candidates found by auto discovery is shown here The switches must be directly connected Directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Switches that are not in the same management VLAN group will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Password Each cluster member s password is its web configurator password Select a member in the Clustering Candidate list and then enter its web configurator password If that switch administrator changes the web configurator password afterwards then it cannot be managed f
269. nfiguring Protocol Based VLAN Click Protocol Based VLAN in the VLAN Port Setting screen to display the configuration screen as shown Note Protocol based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN Figure 56 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN Name c NN Ethernet type C Others Hex VID Priority o gt Add Cancel index Active Port Name Ethernet type VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this protocol based VLAN Port Type a port to be included in this protocol based VLAN This port must belong to a static VLAN in order to participate in a protocol based VLAN See Chapter 9 on page 95 for more details on setting up VLANs Name Enter up to 32 alpha numeric characters to identify this protocol based VLAN Ethernet type Use the drop down list box to select a predefined protocol to be included in this protocol based VLAN or select Others and type the protocol number in hexadecimal notation For example the IP protocol in hexadecimal notation is 0800 and Novell IPX protocol is 8137 Note Protocols in th
270. ng or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect it to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution f the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the device and the power source Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device The length of exposed bare power wire should not exceed 7mm stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately Your product is marked with this symbol which is known as the WEEE mark WEEE H MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Safety Warnings MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Introduction and HardWare csssvcscsssdeascccisccnseicctesedeckudenaschevnitmcsavasasvehisiwatiatants
271. nications Corp 34 9 Service Port Access Control Service Access Control allows you to decide what services you may use to access the Switch You may also change the default service port and configure trusted computer s for each service in the Remote Management screen discussed MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 34 Access Control later Click Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control to view the screen as shown Figure 181 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control Service Access Control g Access Control Services Active Service Port Timeout Telnet Vv 3 SSH e l2 FTP 2 bi HTTP 2 o B Minutes HTTPS iv 443 ICMP Vv SNMP Vv Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 111 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Services Services you may use to access the Switch are listed here Active Service Port Timeout Select this option for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the Switch For Telnet SSH FTP HTTP or HTTPS services you may change the default service port by typing the new port number in the Server Port field If you change the default port number then you will have to let people who wish to use the service know the new port number for that service Type how many minutes a management session via the web configurator
272. ning normally Mini GBIC Slots LNK Green On The link to this port is up Off The link to this port is not connected ACT Green Blinking This port is receiving or transmitting data Gigabit Ethernet Ports LNK Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from an Ethernet ACT network On The link to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from an Ethernet network On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down FDX Amber On The Gigabit port is negotiating in full duplex mode Blinking There is congestion in half duplex mode Off The Gigabit port is negotiating in half duplex mode MGMT 10 Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from an Ethernet device On The port is connected at 10Mbps Off The port is not connected at 10Mbps or to an Ethernet device MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Table 2 LED Descriptions continued LED CoLOR S TU DESCRIPTION 100 Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from an Ethernet device On The port is connected at 100Mbps Off The port is not connected at 100Mbps or to an Ethernet device 3 4 Configuring the Switch You may use the embedded web configurator or command line interface to configure the Switch If you re using the web configurator you need Internet Explorer
273. nnection for LIST W Ww w 1 owner group 3042210 Jul 01 12 00 ras rw rw rw 1 owner group 393216 Jul 01 12 00 config W Ww w l owner group 0 Jul 01 12 00 fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 rw rw rw l owner group 0 Jul 01 12 00 config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 226 File sent OK ftp 297 bytes received in 0 00Seconds 297000 00Kbytes sec ftp bin 200 Type I OK ftp put 390BBA0 bin fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 226 File received OK ftp 262144 bytes sent in 0 63Seconds 415 44Kbytes sec ftp MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 37 Cluster Management The following table explains some of the FTP parameters Table 119 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION User Enter admin Password The web configurator password default is 1234 ls Enter this command to list the name of cluster member switch s firmware and configuration file 390BBAO bin This is the name of the firmware file you want to upload to the cluster member switch fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s firmware name as seen in the cluster manager switch config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s configuration file name as seen in the cluster manager switch MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 37 Cluster Management 37
274. nning Tree This link takes you to screens where you can configure the RSTP MRSTP Protocol MSTP to prevent network loops Bandwidth This link takes you to a screen where you can configure bandwidth limits Control on the Switch Broadcast This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters Storm Control Mirroring This link takes you to screens where you can copy traffic from one port or ports to another port in order that you can examine the traffic from the first port without interference Link This link takes you to screens where you can logically aggregate physical Aggregation links to form one logical higher bandwidth link Port This link takes you to a screen where you can configure IEEE 802 1 x port Authentication authentication as well as MAC authentication for clients communicating via the Switch Port Security This link takes you to screens where you can activate MAC address learning and set the maximum number of MAC addresses to learn on a port Classifier This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to group packets based on the specified criteria Policy Rule This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to perform special treatment on the grouped packets Queuing This link takes you to a screen where you can configure queuing with Method associated queue weights for each port MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapte
275. nooping to forward group multicast traffic only to ports that are members of that group Querier Select this option to allow the Switch to send IGMP General Query messages to the VLANs with the multicast hosts attached MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 207 Chapter 24 Multicast Table 60 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Host Timeout Specify the time from 1 to 16 711 450 in seconds that elapses before the Switch removes an IGMP group membership entry if it does not receive report messages from the port 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 to which the Switch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets Otherwise select No Change to not replace the priority IGMP Filtering Select Active to enable IGMP filtering to control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join Note If you enable IGMP filtering you must create and assign IGMP filtering profiles for the ports that you want to allow to join multicast groups Unknown Multicast Frame Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives an unknown multicast frame Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Reserved Multicast Group Port The IP address range of 224 0 0 0 to 224 0 0 255 are reserved for multicasting on the local network only For example 224 0 0 1 is for all hosts on a local ne
276. note 373 web configurator 57 getting help 65 home 58 login 57 logout 64 navigation panel 59 weight queuing 194 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR 194 WRR Weighted Round Robin Scheduling 194 Z ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System 302 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide
277. nown Authority screen pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click Examine Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the Switch If Accept this certificate temporarily for this session is selected then click OK to continue in Netscape MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 34 Access Control Select Accept this certificate permanently to import the Switch s certificate into the SSL client Figure 178 Security Certificate 1 Netscape Soe nn x Unable to verifyfhe identity of Avdle b as a trusted site A Possible reasons o Ramp e Your browser does not recognize the Certificate Authority that issued the site s certificate The site s certificate is incomplete due tga server misconfiquration You are connected to a site pretending to CKAN 12345 possibly to obtain your confidential information Please notify the site s webmaster about this problem Before accepting this certificate you should examine tfis FRU taal dh Are you willing to to accept this certificate for the purpose of identify p 48 00a0c5012345 Accept this certificate permanently Accept this certificate temporarily For this session Do not accept this certificate and do not connect to this Web site ox e se Figure 179 Security Certificate 2 Netscape Security Error Domain Name Mismatch 0x 192 68 ePWficate presented belofigs 45 It is fossible though unli ht
278. nsert the entry to the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to edit the rule IP Address This field displays the IP address IP Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Default Gateway This field displays the IP address of the default gateway Delete Check the management IP addresses that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkboxes in the Delete column MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 8 7 Port Setup Use this screen to configure Switch port settings Click Basic Setting gt Port Setup in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen Figure 46 Basic Setting gt Port Setup XINnEDL NEN Port Active Name Type Speed Duplex Flow Control 802 1p Priority BPDU Control mi j ato xz r or Pe z 1 v momom Ato F ox Peer z 2 m tonoonoocom auto s Fr oz Peer v 3 Ww
279. nting bracket holes into the rack 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to attach the second mounting bracket on the other side of the rack 32 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Hardware Overview This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the Switch and shows you how to make the hardware connections 3 1 Front Panel MGS 3712 The following figure shows the front panel of the MGS 3712 The front panel contains the Switch LEDs 8 RJ 45 Gigabit Ethernet GbE ports four dual personality interfaces each consisting of a mini GBIC slot and an RJ 45 GbE port one console and one management port for local management and a slot for alarm management Figure 8 Front Panel MGS 3712 LEDs Console Port Management Port ZyXEL nes 3712 M 2 4 6 m ex uw ia fr oe nono dm mr mi pale WIR wae Wa e on orr BNI EN Wm Me liar rax ala 4 so D amp D 100 m M E F AC INPUT Sm ON puri FEES 100 240VAC AME EE I E m rasy 50 60Hz 0 64 MAX 3 5 7 EB m MGMT CONSOLE H uzm 4020 zu
280. nued LABEL DESCRIPTION VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Port will be forwarded This field displays the port where the MAC address shown in the next field Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 117 Chapter 10 Static MAC Forward Setup MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Static Multicast Forward Setup Use these screens to configure static Multicast address forwarding 11 1 Static Multicast Forwarding Overview A multicast MAC address is the MAC address of a member of a multicast group A static multicast address is a multicast MAC address that has been manually entered in the multicast table Static multicast addresses do not age out Static multicast forwarding allows you the administrator to forward multicast frames to a member without the member having to join the group first If a multicast group has no members then the switch will either flood the multicast frames to all ports or drop them You can configure this in the Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting screen see Section 24 3 on page 207 Figure 61 shows such unknown multicast frames flooded to all ports With static multicast forwarding you can forward these multicasts to port s within a VLAN group Figure 62 shows frames being forwarded to devi
281. o C 1 Access the Switch from the MGMT port through http 192 168 0 1 by default Log into the Switch by entering the username default admin and password default 1234 2 Goto Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN and create a VLAN with ID of 100 Add ports 5 6 and 7 in the VLAN by selecting Fixed in the Control field as shown Deselect Tx Tagging because you don t want outgoing traffic to contain this VLAN tag Click Add Figure 20 Tutorial Create a VLAN and Add Ports to It Static YLAN ACTIVE Name VLAN Group ID 8 Normal Forbidden Fixe Cancel Clear Port Control Tagging x Normal M Tx Tagging 1 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv Tx Tagging 2 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 4 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv TxTagging 5 C Normal Fixed C Forbidden Tx Tagging 6 C Normal Fixed C Forbidden Tx Tagging 7 C Normal Fixed C Forbidden Tx Tagging VLAN Status M Tadgi MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials 3 Goto Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting and set the PVID of the ports 5 6 and 7 to 100 This tags untagged incoming frames on ports 5 6 and 7 with the tag 100 Figure 21 Tutorial Tag Untagged Frames VLAN Status c OMELET Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vian GVRP O Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Fra
282. o use the proper screws may damage the unit 2 3 1 1 Precautions Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it contains Make sure the position of the Switch does not make the rack unstable or top heavy Take all necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 2 3 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch 1 Position a mounting bracket on one side of the Switch lining up the four screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the Switch Figure 6 Attaching the Mounting Brackets 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the M3 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the Switch 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the second mounting bracket on the other side of the Switch 4 You may now mount the Switch on a rack Proceed to the next section MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 31 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 2 3 3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack 1 Position a mounting bracket that is already attached to the Switch on one side of the rack lining up the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the rack Figure 7 Mounting the Switch on a Rack n D Q D Q D D Ll D Q Li n Q QO oD 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the M5 flat head screws through the mou
283. o which connected device s do not receive these packets In Band Management IP Address DHCP Client Select this option if you have a DHCP server that can assign the Switch an IP address subnet mask a default gateway IP address and a domain name server IP address automatically Static IP Address Select this option if you don t have a DHCP server or if you wish to assign static IP address information to the Switch You need to fill in the following fields when you select this option IP Address Enter the IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 254 VID Enter the VLAN identification number associated with the Switch IP address This is the VLAN ID of the CPU and is used for management only The default is 1 All ports by default are fixed members of this management VLAN in order to manage the device from any port If a port is not a member of this VLAN then users on that port cannot access the device To access the Switch make sure the port that you are connected to is a member of Management VLAN Out of band Management IP Address IP Address Enter the IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 192 1
284. ocol 13 1 3 STP Port States 13 1 4 STP assigns five port states to eliminate packet looping A bridge port is not allowed to go directly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops Table 25 STP Port States PORTE DESCRIPTION Disabled STP is disabled default Blocking Only configuration and management BPDUS are received and processed Listening All BPDUs are received and processed Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Learning All BPDUs are received and processed Information frames are submitted to the learning process but not forwarded Forwarding All BPDUs are received and processed All information frames are received and forwarded Multiple RSTP MRSTP Multiple RSTP is ZyXEL s proprietary feature that is compatible with RSTP and STP With MRSTP you can have more than one spanning tree on your Switch and assign port s to each tree Each spanning tree operates independently with its own bridge information In the following example there are two RSTP instances MRSTP 1 and MRSTP2 on switch A To set up MRSTP activate MRSTP on the Switch and specify which port s belong to which spanning tree MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 127 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 1 5 13 1 5 1 Note Each port can belong to one STP tree only Figure 66 MRSTP Network Example Multiple STP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802
285. ocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Refer to Table 49 on page 182 for more information Destinatio n IP Address Address Prefix Enter a destination IP address in dotted decimal notation Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Socket Number Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Refer to Table 49 on page 182 for more information Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields back to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 20 3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Classifier screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the Index field Note When two rules conflict with each other a higher layer rule has pr
286. on Authorization and Accounting AAA ssssee 221 PUN NNE BEO n c ICE OI LSU 222 25 La RADIUS ama TACGACO F saioari nara aai aaa Er EE 222 PE e TM T E E N E E E E A E tne 222 25 2 1 RADIUS Sarver SCID sapanen a e iada 223 252 2 IAGAGor GONE SUR aiiin ici d AAN 225 SE ASSI aaa a a te terete E 227 252 4 Vendor Specie AWDIS coc ai cetcracccessctcaiessetesaneepadceraiedesataraniniedt EEG 230 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Table of Contents 25 3 Supported RADIUS EUCDUIBB 1 sacs rr orga a agree piod obti da gon pa and RE 231 25 9 1 Attributes Used Tor Authentication Liuius siut amena essa etae oma coast acit basa tds 232 25 38 Attributes Used Tor AGCOUMBING uui ceci eee dine eot do tetra dnte dentia 293 Chapter 26 IP Source CE 235 26 alus Guard CVO TT E o o TIS 235 Bo LT BH OP Snoop nig Overa aces eite Uu dap ED uds MAUI Rar 236 26 1 2 ARP TSC UID ETE a eor icc prb ae nde us dea pebcd n a n Ex dg bp Rude 238 SB IP IDEO DUBIE eee one uso mma nna a ou rere mete GEO RED 239 209 UP Source Guard Stane BIMM e t 240 284 DPOP HODIE nia E ebbe abe DO p agr 243 20 5 DHCP Snpaping CONOS odo ies odas secialoceadee idis lated Made beet Quod gU b es niddst sape sl gd pre ERR UM EDEN 246 20 5 1 DHCP Snooping Pot Co Tee usicccceite rco iuste recte eden aes 248 26 5 2 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure siosioina uenon Edda nari eara Rak E eras a 249 mper e HS 251 26 6 1 ARP In
287. ontrol Setup Click Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control in the navigation panel to bring up the screen as shown next Figure 79 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control DIET Active m Port AS in Active Egress Rate Active Commit Rate Active Peak Rate r Kbps m Kbps E Kbps 1 m fi Kbps 1 Kbps m fi Kbps 2 C hooo Kbps ri Kbps rj isd Kbps 3 ri fi Kbps 3 1 Kbps ri fi Kbps 4 O fi Kbps 1 Kbps O fi Kbps 5 fi Kbps ri 1 Kbps m fi Kbps 6 n fi Kbps 1 Kbps m fi Kbps i antium catia a i Apply Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 33 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable bandwidth control on the Switch Port This field displays the port number i Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Ingress Rate Active Select this check box to activate commit rate limits on this port Commit Specify the guaranteed bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for Rate the incoming traffic flow on a port The commit rate should be less than the peak rate The sum of commit rates cannot be greater than or equal to the
288. option 82 field of the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames See Chapter 32 on page 287 for more information about DHCP relay option 82 When the DHCP server responds the Switch removes the information in the Agent Information field before forwarding the response to the original source You can configure this setting for each source VLAN This setting is independent of the DHCP relay settings Chapter 32 on page 287 26 1 1 4 Configuring DHCP Snooping Follow these steps to configure DHCP snooping on the Switch 1 Enable DHCP snooping on the Switch 2 Enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN and configure DHCP relay option 82 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 237 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 3 26 1 2 Configure trusted and untrusted ports and specify the maximum number of DHCP packets that each port can receive per second Configure static bindings ARP Inspection Overview Use ARP inspection to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network This can prevent many kinds of man in the middle attacks such as the one in the following example Figure 123 Example Man in the middle Attack In this example computer B tries to establish a connection with computer A Computer X is in the same broadcast domain as computer A and intercepts the ARP request for computer A Then computer X does the following things t pretends to be computer A and responds to computer B t pretends to be computer B and sends a mes
289. or routers It allows a Switch to interact with other M R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network Loop Guard IP Source Guard Use the loop guard feature to protect against network loops on the edge of your network Use IP source guard to filter unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 42 Product Specifications Table 125 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Link Aggregation Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link Port Authentication and Security For security the Switch allows authentication using IEEE 802 1x with an external RADIUS server and port security that allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch Authentication Authorization and Accounting The Switch supports authentication authorization and accounting services via RADIUS and TACACS AAA servers Device Management Use the web configurator or commands to easily configure the rich range of features on the Switch Port Cloning Use the port cloning feature to copy th
290. ormal v Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Adi Cancel Clear Vv VLAN Status Tagging v Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagaing M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging Note The VLAN Group ID field in this screen and the VID field in the IP Setup screen refer to the same VLAN ID 3 Since the VLAN2 network is connected to port 1 on the Switch select Fixed to configure port 1 to be a permanent member of the VLAN only 4 To ensure that VLAN unaware devices such as computers and hubs can receive frames properly clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending 5 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off 6 1 2 Setting Port VID Use PVID to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 6 Initial Setup Example In the example network configure 2 as the port VID on port 1 so th
291. ort Sort by Define how the Switch displays and arranges the data in the summary table below Select MAC to display and arrange the data according to MAC address Select VID to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group Select PORT to display and arrange the data according to port number Transfer Type Select Dynamic to MAC forwarding and click the Transfer button to change all dynamically learned MAC address entries in the summary table below into static entries They also display in the Static MAC Forwarding screen Select Dynamic to MAC filtering and click the Transfer button to change all dynamically learned MAC address entries in the summary table below into MAC filtering entries These entries will then display only in the Filtering screen and the default filtering action is Discard source Cancel Click Cancel to change the fields back to their last saved values Index This is the incoming frame index number MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came VID This is the VLAN group to which this frame belongs Port This is the port where the above MAC address is forwarded Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 38 MAC Table MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide ARP Table This
292. ort 1 a1 12 12 12 12 01 172 23 37 222 inifinity static 1 18 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 74 IP Source Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding Mac Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how many days hours minutes and seconds the binding is valid for example 2d3h4m5s means the binding is still valid for 2 days 3 hours 4 minutes and 5 seconds This field displays infinity if the binding is always valid for example a static binding Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator dhcp snooping This binding was learned by snooping DHCP packets VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports 26 3 IP Source Guard Static Binding Use this screen to manage static bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection Static bindings are uniquely identified by the MAC address and VLAN ID Each MAC address and VLAN ID can only be in one static binding If you try to create a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID as an existing static b
293. ot port on this Switch to the root switch This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Configuration Name Revision Number This field displays the configuration name for this MST region This field displays the revision number for this MST region Configuration Digest Topology Changed Times A configuration digest is generated from the VLAN MSTI mapping information This field displays the 16 octet signature that is included in an MSTP BPDU This field displays the digest when MSTP is activated on the system This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured Instance These fields display the MSTI to VLAN mapping In other words which VLANs run on each spanning tree instance Instance This field displays the MSTI ID VLAN This field displays which VLANs are mapped to an MSTI MSTI Select the MST instance settings you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the MST instance Our Bridge is this switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Switch is the root switch Chapter 13 S
294. panning Tree Protocol Table 32 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Internal Cost This is the path cost from the root port in this MST instance to the regional root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the MST instance MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Bandwidth Control This chapter shows you how you can cap the maximum bandwidth using the Bandwidth Control screen 14 1 Bandwidth Control Overview Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and or out going traffic flows on a port 14 1 1 CIR and PIR The Committed Information Rate CIR is the guaranteed bandwidth for the incoming traffic flow on a port The Peak Information Rate PIR is the maximum bandwidth allowed for the incoming traffic flow on a port when there is no network congestion The CIR and PIR should be set for all ports that use the same uplink bandwidth If the CIR is reached packets are sent at the rate up to the PIR When network congestion occurs packets through the ingress port exceeding the CIR will be marked for drop Note The CIR should be less than the PIR The sum of CIRs cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 147 Chapter 14 Bandwidth Control 14 2 Bandwidth C
295. pecify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate administrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the local user accounts in the Access Control Logins screen The TACACS and RADIUS are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate administrator accounts The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for administrator accounts specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured in the Access Control gt Logins screen Select radius to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via your RADIUS server Select tacacs to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via your TACACS server Authorization Use this section to configure authorization settings on the Switch Type Set whether the Switch provides the following services to a user Exec Allow an administrator which logs in the Switch through Telnet or SSH to have different access privilege level assigned via the external server e Dotlx Allow an IEEE 802 1x client to have different bandwidth li
296. port Click Management gt MAC Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen Figure 192 Management gt MAC Table Num all Static Condition C vip C Port Sort by MAC v o Dynamic to MAC forwarding Transfer Type C Dynamic to MAC filtering Owcl sl st E os MAC Address 1 00 00 aa 10 01 73 00 00 68 7c 14 80 00 02 e3 56 16 9d 00 02 e3 57 ea 1c 00 04 80 9b 78 00 D0 0d 88 ca af b2 00 0e 7b e4 17 19 00 0f b0 80 e7 56 Index VID O wN On amp Why e By abn EO MEL ena RET CIE Search Transfer Cancel Port Type 27 dynamic 28 dynamic 27 dynamic 27 dynamic 27 dynamic 27 dynamic 27 dynamic 27 dynamic MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 38 MAC Table The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 121 Management gt MAC Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Condition Select one of the buttons and click Search to only display the data which matches the criteria you specified Select All to display any entry in the MAC table of the Switch Select Static to display the MAC entries manually configured on the Switch Select MAC and enter a MAC address in the field provided to display a specified MAC entry Select VID and enter a VLAN ID in the field provided to display the MAC entries belonging to the specified VLAN Select Port and enter a port number in the field provided to display the MAC addresses which are forwarded on the specified p
297. priority Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 31 4 DSCP to IEEE 802 1p Priority Settings You can configure the DSCP to IEEE 802 1p mapping to allow the Switch to prioritize all traffic based on the incoming DSCP value according to the DiffServ to IEEE 802 1p mapping table The following table shows the default DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping Table 93 Default DSCP IEEE 802 1p Mapping DSCP VALUE 0 7 8 15 16 23 24 31 32 39 40 47 48 55 56 63 IEEE 802 1p 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 31 Differentiated Services 31 4 1 Configuring DSCP Settings To change the DSCP IEEE 802 1p mapping click the DSCP Setting link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 155 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting ojo v en z 16 2 v 24 3 v 32 4 7 40 5 v 48 6 v 56 7 v e DSCP Setting DSCP to 802 1p Mapping Se Diffserv 1 0 a o 3 0 a o gt 5 0 gt e 0 gt 70 ey hA nha aha aha ah ha vae aa aA 2 a2 zA Wer aha 26 3 3x 29 3 2bA kA sz aafaa sam c4 cz a7fae aef4e aa 4 a5 sz sfa
298. r MAX This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor MIN This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor Threshold This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above 80 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 8 Basic Setting gt System Info continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Fan Speed RPM A properly functioning fan is an essential component along with a sufficiently ventilated cool operating environment in order for the device to stay within the temperature threshold Each fan has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the fan speed falls below the threshold shown Current This field displays this fan s current speed in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MAX This field displays this fan s maximum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MIN This field displays this fan s minimum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute RPM lt 41 is displayed for speeds too small to measure Threshold This field displays the minimum speed at which a normal fan should work Status Normal indicates that this fan is functioning above the minimum speed Error indicates that this fan is functioning below the minimum speed Voltage V The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that is
299. r Two Rate Three Color Marker trTCM defined in RFC 2698 is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to two user defined rates the Committed Information Rate CIR and the Peak Information Rate PIR Port Mirroring Port mirroring allows you to copy traffic going from one or all ports to another or all ports in order that you can examine the traffic from the mirror port the port you copy the traffic to without interference Static Route Static routes allow the Switch to communicate with management stations not reachable via the default gateway Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD using multicast traffic across a network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network This improves bandwidth utilization by reducing multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management IP Multicast With IP multicast the Switch delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody In addition the Switch can send packets to Ethernet devices that are not VLAN aware by untagging removing the VLAN tags IP multicast packets STP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Rapid STP MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol M R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges
300. r 5 The Web Configurator Table 5 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION VLAN Stacking This link takes you to screens where you can configure VLAN stacking which helps to distinguish multiple customers VLANs Multicast This link takes you to screens where you can configure various multicast features IGMP snooping and create multicast VLANs AAA This link takes you to a screen where you can configure authentication authorization and accounting services via external servers The external servers can be either RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service or TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus IP Source This link takes you to screens where you can configure filtering of Guard unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network Loop Guard This link takes you to a screen where you can configure protection against network loops that occur on the edge of your network VLAN Mapping This link takes you to screens where you can configure VLAN mapping settings on the Switch Layer 2 This link takes you to a screen where you can configure L2PT Layer 2 Protocol Protocol Tunneling settings on the Switch Tunneling IP Application Static Routing This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static routes A static route defines how the Switch should forward traffic by configuring the TCP IP parameters manually DiffServ This link take
301. r Add button does NOT save the changes permanently All unsaved changes are erased after you reboot the Switch 33 4 Reboot System Reboot System allows you to restart the Switch without physically turning the power off It also allows you to load configuration one Config 1 or configuration two Config 2 when you reboot Follow the steps below to reboot the Switch 1 Inthe Maintenance screen click the Config 1 button next to Reboot System to reboot and load configuration one The following screen displays Figure 165 Reboot System Confirmation Microsoft Internet Explorer L x 2 4re you sure you want to reboot system Cancel 2 Click OK again and then wait for the Switch to restart This takes up to two minutes This does not affect the Switch s configuration Click Config 2 and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load configuration two on the Switch 33 5 Firmware Upgrade Make sure you have downloaded and unzipped the correct model firmware and version to your computer before uploading to the device Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 33 Maintenance Click Management gt Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade to view the screen as shown next Figure 166 Management gt Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade Maintenance To upgrade the internal switch firmw
302. r a descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address Enter the MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs Note Static MAC addresses do not age out VID Enter the VLAN identification number Port Enter the port where the MAC address entered in the previous field will be automatically forwarded Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this rule if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values Clear Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh Index Click an index number to modify a static MAC address rule for a port Active This field displays whether this static MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address This field displays the MAC address that will be forwarded and the VLAN identification number to which the MAC address belongs MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 10 Static MAC Forward Setup Table 21 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding conti
303. r bias current transmitted optical power received optical power and transceiver supply voltage is above or below a factory set normal range transceiverddmiEventCle ar 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 45 27 2 2 This trap is sent when all device operating parameters return to the normal operating range MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 34 Access Control Table 105 AAA Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION authenticatio authenticationFailure 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 This trap is sent when n authentication fails due to incorrect user name and or password AuthenticationFailureEven MGS 3712F This trap is sent when tOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 2 authentication fails due to 5 2 1 incorrect user name and or password MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 2 5 2 1 RADIUSNotReachableEve MGS 3712F This trap is sent when there is ntOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 2 no response message from the 5 2 1 RADIUS server MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 2 5 2 1 RADIUSNotReachableEve MGS 3712F This trap is sent when the ntClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 2 RADIUS server can be 5 2 2 reached MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 2 5 2 2 accounting RADIUSAccountingNotRea MGS 3712F This trap is sent when there is chableEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 2 no response message from the 5 2 1 RADIUS accounting server MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 2 5 2 1 RADI USAccountingNotRea MG
304. r loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN Use this section of the screen to add VLANs upon which the Switch is to perform IGMP snooping Name Enter the descriptive name of the VLAN for identification purposes VID Enter the ID of a static VLAN the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Note You cannot configure the same VLAN ID as in the MVR screen Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click this to clear the fields Index This is the number of the IGMP snooping VLAN entry in the table Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 2n Chapter 24 Multicast 24 5 IGMP Filtering Profile An IGMP filtering profile specifies a range of multicast
305. rame DA Destination Address Priority 802 1p Priority SA Source Address Len Length and type of Ethernet Etype frame Tunnel Tag Protocol I Dentifier added on a Data Frame data TPID tunnel port VID VLAN ID FCS Frame Check Sequence 23 4 Configuring VLAN Stacking Click Advanced Applications gt VLAN Stacking to display the screen as shown Note You can not enable VLAN mapping and VLAN stacking at the same time Figure 102 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking OME ET aD Port based QinQ Selective QinQ Active Ci Port Role Tunnel TPID Yi Normal Y In 1 Normal bd 8100 2 Norma x B100 3 Normal s 8100 4 Normal 8100 5 Normal Y 8100 6 Normal g 8100 7 Normal d 8100 8 Normal he 8100 9 Normal X 8100 10 Normal M 8100 11 Norma x 100 12 Normal M 8100 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 56 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable VLAN stacking on the Switch Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking Table 56 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and the
306. rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high 26 1 2 3 Syslog The Switch can send syslog messages to the specified syslog server Chapter 36 on page 331 when it forwards or discards ARP packets The Switch can consolidate log messages and send log messages in batches to make this mechanism more efficient 26 1 2 4 Configuring ARP Inspection Follow these steps to configure ARP inspection on the Switch 1 Configure DHCP snooping See Section 26 1 1 4 on page 237 Note It is recommended you enable DHCP snooping at least one day before you enable ARP inspection so that the Switch has enough time to build the binding table 2 Enable ARP inspection on each VLAN 3 Configure trusted and untrusted ports and specify the maximum number of ARP packets that each port can receive per second 26 2 IP Source Guard Use this screen to look at the current bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection Bindings are used by DHCP snooping and ARP inspection to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized packets in the network The Switch learns MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard the bindings by snooping DHCP packets dynamic bindings and from information provided manually by administrators static bindings To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard Figure 124 IP Source Guard OME ee Static Binding DHCP Snooping Arp Inspection Index Mac Address IP Address Lease Type VID P
307. rded TRTCM operates in one of two modes color blind or color aware In color blind mode packets are marked based on evaluating against the PIR and CIR regardless of if they have previously been marked or not In the color aware mode packets are marked based on both existing color and evaluation against the PIR and CIR If the packets do not match any of colors then the packets proceed unchanged 31 2 1 TRTCM Color blind Mode All packets are evaluated against the PIR If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red Otherwise it is evaluated against the CIR If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow Finally if it is below the CIR then it is marked green Figure 151 TRTCM Color blind Mode Zan MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 31 Differentiated Services 31 2 2 TRTCM Color aware Mode In color aware mode the evaluation of the packets uses the existing packet loss priority TRTCM can increase a packet loss priority of a packet but it cannot decrease it Packets that have been previously marked red or yellow can only be marked with an equal or higher packet loss priority Packets marked red high packet loss priority continue to be red without evaluation against the PIR or CIR Packets marked yellow can only be marked red or remain yellow so they are only evaluated against the PIR Only the packets marked green are first evaluated against the PIR and then if they don t exceed the PIR level are they evaluated a
308. re is unauthorized access to my Switch via telnet HTTP and SSH Click the Display button in the System Log field in the Management gt Diagnostic screen to check for unauthorized access to your Switch To avoid unauthorized access configure the secured client setting in the Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management screen for telnet HTTP and SSH see Section 34 10 on page 327 Computers not belonging to the secured client set cannot get permission to access the Switch 41 3 Switch Configuration lost my configuration settings after restart the Switch Make sure you save your configuration into the Switch s nonvolatile memory each time you make changes Click Save at the top right corner of the web configurator to save the configuration permanently See also Section 33 3 on page 298 for more information about how to save your configuration amp Save Status F Logout H Help MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Product Specifications The following tables summarize the Switch s hardware and firmware features Table 124 Hardware Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Dimensions Standard 19 rack mountable 438 mm W x 225 mm D x 45 45 mm H Weight 3 4 Kg Power Specification One Backup Power Supply BPS connector AC 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 0 6 A Max DC 36 VDC 72 VDC 0 85 A Max Note There is no tolerance for the DC input voltage Power Consumption 30 W
309. re removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port from a host MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Table 60 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Fast Leave Enter an IGMP fast leave timeout value from 200 to 6 348 800 in miliseconds Select this option to have the Switch use this timeout to update the forwarding table for the port This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port from a host Group Limited Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Max Group Num Enter the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Once a port is registered in the specified number of multicast groups any new IGMP join report frame s is dropped on this port Throttling IGMP throttling controls how the Switch deals with the IGMP reports when the maximum number of the IGMP groups a port can join is reached Select Deny to drop any new IGMP join report received on this port until an existing multicast forwarding table entry is aged out Select Replace to replace an existing entry in the multicast forwarding table with the new IGMP report s received on this port IGMP Filtering Profile Select the name of th
310. related labels you use to create a static route Table 90 IP Application gt Static Routing LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Name Enter a descriptive name up to 10 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination IP Address IP Subnet Enter the subnet mask for this destination Routing is always based on Mask network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate Address neighbor of your Switch that will forward the packet to the destination The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your Switch Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Add Click Add to insert a new static route to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your ch
311. reneenret tetro nemer iter enenn 290 22 4 Configuring DHCP VLAN Settings ausis bene tierna rtr kk nhi iiin 291 32 4 1 Example DHCP Relay for Two VLANMS en entrenar eiai 292 Fart V cunb gl 295 Chapter 33 Lucr M 9 9 0OOO M 297 xxm The Maintenance SEIGE m t m 297 99 2 Load Factory Deno ar aai a 298 Daa se GOMA NR LU TEE 298 aus REDONE OY Sti E bassi opa aun aeri ga Pb ora aet bong ab ebd pcd a o ud 299 rx lre a yt c 299 39 85 Restore s Contiguration PIG chastise te aston eae 300 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Table of Contents mot Backup a Coniguration EI sranna pedal RA Re UO mami PL a a a o pe 301 eer dalas e au neir i ssacisubuid E N ind A ui asta deus barman urs ases a apa D dd 301 23 9 1 Fllorgume Conventie cccccs cram isse ue rests Bibetenc co EI SeH Gena 301 Bom S FIP Command Line PIOGeBdulb 2 5 5 n EH Cu ae s eda rog Fn eiu a anc M 302 ooo bats acia Edi Uc omm 303 ERN PTR ASSICUONS e 303 Chapter 34 POCOSS CON Ol 305 se AODSBE ONO aonisxpuexiatupde d d dst oaa UE Rab eO a dienes 305 34 2 The Access Control Main SOO ssccccccccasstecatcscck enr tuu suse rcee eee ce an RE UR C2 XL Dd c ARP DUE PESE a 305 PEO AROOLONMP T E T S 306 4 5 1 SRME SS TE ODD sieniin qr q Ebc ut abb ett ded ete
312. riber device connected to this port in the same subscriber VLAN the receiving port will still be on the list of forwarding destination MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast for the multicast traffic Otherwise the Switch removes the receiver port from the forwarding table Figure 110 MVR Multicast Television Example ri 24 7 General MVR Configuration Use the MVR screen to create multicast VLANs and select the receiver port s and a source port for each multicast VLAN Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR link to display the screen as shown next Note You can create up to five multicast VLANs and up to 256 multicast rules on the Switch MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 215 Chapter 24 Multicast Note Your Switch automatically creates a static VLAN with the same VID when you create a multicast VLAN in this screen Figure 111 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR sD Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active O Name Multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority D Mode amp Dynamic Compatible Port Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging None O 1 e oO e r 2 e e Lol O 3 C O ce C 4 O oO e m 5 e e e D 6 C C e 3 td e O e C 8 e e I O GI NE CU gE GG I A SS I gS Add Cancel VLAN Active Name Mode Source Port Receiver Port 802 1p Delete Delete Cancel
313. ription of the problem and the steps you took to solve it 4 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User s Guide Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device Note Notes tell you other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions The MGS 3712 and MGS 3712F models may be referred to as the Switch the device the system or the product in this User s Guide Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and
314. rk Select this check box to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Table 17 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Ingress Check If this check box is selected for a port the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not include this port in its member set Clear this check box to disable ingress filtering PVID A PVID Port VLAN ID is a tag that adds to incoming untagged frames received on a port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines Enter a number between land 4094 as the port VLAN ID GVRP Select this check box to allow GVRP on this port Acceptable Specify the type of frames allowed on a port Choices are All Tag Only Frame Type and Untag Only Select All from the drop down list box to accept all untagged or tagged frames on this port This is the default setting Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port All untagged frames will be dropped Select Untag Only to accept only unt
315. rmat and add all the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1s in binary There are three 255s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 VID Enter the ID of a VLAN with which the untagged frames from the IP subnet specified in this subnet based VLAN are tagged This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the Advanced Applications VLAN screens Priority Select the priority level that the Switch assigns to frames belonging to this VLAN Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Index This is the index number identifying this subnet based VLAN Click on any of these numbers to edit an existing subnet based VLAN Active This field shows whether the subnet based VLAN is active or not Name This field shows the name the subnet based VLAN IP This field shows the IP address of the subnet for this subnet based VLAN Mask Bits This field shows the subnet mask in bit number format for this subnet based VLAN VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the frames which belong to this subnet based VLAN Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames be
316. rom the Cluster Manager ts Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon A appears in the member summary list below If multiple devices have the same password then hold SHIFT and click those switches to select them Then enter their common web configurator password Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Refresh Click Refresh to perform auto discovery again to list potential cluster members The next summary table shows the information for the clustering members configured Index This is the index number of a cluster member switch MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This is the cluster member switch s model name Remove Select this checkbox and then click the Remove button to remove a cluster member switch from the cluster Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 37 Cluster Management MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 38 1 MAC Table This chapter introduces the MAC Table screen MAC Table
317. rries IEEE 802 1Q tag information The value of this field is 0x8100 as defined in IEEE 802 1Q Other vendors may use a different value such as 0x9100 Tunnel TPID is the VLAN stacking tag type the Switch adds to the outgoing frames sent through a Tunnel Port of the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure Priority refers to the IEEE 802 1p standard that allows the service provider to prioritize traffic based on the class of service CoS the customer has paid for On the Switch configure priority level of inner IEEE 802 1Q tag in the Port Setup screen 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest VID is the VLAN ID SP VID is the VID for the second service provider s VLAN tag 23 3 1 Frame Format The frame format for an untagged Ethernet frame a single tagged 802 1Q frame customer and a double tagged 802 1Q frame service provider is shown next Configure the fields as highlighted in the Switch VLAN Stacking screen Table 54 Single and Double Tagged 802 11Q Frame Format DA SA Len Dat FCS Untagged Etype a Ethernet frame DA SA TPI Priorit VI Len Dat FCS IEEE 802 1Q D y D Etype a customer tagged frame D SA Tunne Priori VI TPI Priorit VI Len Dat FCS Double A I TPID ty D D y D Etype a tagged frame MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking Table 55 802 1Q F
318. rs These users have read only access You can give users higher privileges via the CLI For more information on assigning privileges see the CLI Reference Guide User Name Set a user name up to 32 ASCII characters long Password Enter your new system password Retype to Retype your new system password for confirmation confirm Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 34 4 SSH Overview Unlike Telnet or FTP which transmit data in clear text SSH Secure Shell is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network Figure 174 SSH Communication Example ET Internet ction nmm R SSH Server m SSH Client MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 34 Access Control 34 5 How SSH works The following table summarizes how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts Figure 175 How SSH Works T Internet 1 Host Identification The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server The server identifies itself with a host key The client encrypts a
319. s the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up Write delay Enter how long 10 65535 seconds the Switch waits to update interval the DHCP snooping database the first time the current bindings change after an update Once the next update is scheduled additional changes in current bindings are automatically included in the next update Renew DHCP Enter the location of a DHCP snooping database and click Renew Snooping URL if you want the Switch to load it You can use this to load dynamic bindings from a different DHCP snooping database than the one specified in Agent URL When the Switch loads dynamic bindings from a DHCP snooping database it does not discard the current dynamic bindings first If there is a conflict the Switch keeps the dynamic binding in volatile memory and updates the Binding collisions counter in the DHCP Snooping screen Section 26 4 on page 243 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 247 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 26 5 1 DHCP Snooping Port Configure Table 77 DHCP Snooping Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values
320. s by restarting the Switch or using CLI commands See the CLI Reference Guide Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID Invalid interfaces Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the port number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the lease time had already expired Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the VLAN ID does not exist anymore Last ignored time This field displays the last time the Switch ignored any bindings for any reason from the DHCP binding database Total ignored bindings counters This section displays the reasons the Switch has ignored bindings any time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database You can clear these counters by restarting the Switch or using CLI commands See the CLI Reference Guide Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID Invalid interfaces This field display
321. s field displays the total number of ARP Reply packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Forwarded This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch forwarded for the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Dropped This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch discarded for the VLAN since the Switch last restarted 26 6 2 ARP Inspection Log Status Use this screen to look at log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet To open this screen click Advanced Application IP Source Guard ARP Inspection Log Status Figure 132 ARP Inspection Log Status ARP Inspection Log Status d Status Clearing log status table Apply Total number of logs 0 index Port VID Sender Mac Sender IP Num Pkts Reason Time The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 82 ARP Inspection Log Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Clearing log status Click Apply to remove all the log messages that were generated table by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet Total number of logs This field displays the number of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet If one or more log messages are dropped due to unavailable buffer there is an entry called overflow with the current number of dropped log messages
322. s r1 O stop only tacacs D Apply 1 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 227 Chapter 25 AAA The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 68 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to specify the methods used to authenticate users accessing the Switch Privilege Enable These fields specify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate access privilege level for administrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the access privilege of accounts via commands See the CLI Reference Guide for local authentication The TACACS and RADIUS are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate the access privilege level of administrators The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for access privilege level specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the access privilege configured for local authentication Select radius or tacacs to have the Switch check the access privilege via the external servers Login These fields s
323. s the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the port number was a trusted interface or does not exist MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide anymore Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 76 DHCP Snooping continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the lease time had already expired Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the VLAN ID does not exist anymore 26 5 DHCP Snooping Configure Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch not on specific VLAN specify the VLAN where the default DHCP server is located and configure the DHCP snooping database The DHCP snooping database stores the current bindings on a secure external TFTP server so that they are still available after a restart To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure Figure 127 DHCP Snooping Configure E DHCP Snooping Configure Port Active DHCP Vian Database Agent URL Timeout interval Write delay interval Renew DHCP Snooping URL VLAN DHCP Snooping r Disable Bo seconds 300 seconds Apply C
324. s you to screens where you can enable DiffServ configure Two Rate Three Color Marker settings and set DSCP to IEEE802 1p mappings DHCP This link takes you to screens where you can configure the DHCP settings Management Maintenance This link takes you to screens where you can perform firmware and configuration file maintenance as well as reboot the system Access Control This link takes you to screens where you can change the system login password and configure SNMP and remote management Diagnostic This link takes you to a screen where you can view system logs and test port s Syslog This link takes you to screens where you can setup system logs and a system log server Cluster This link takes you to screens where you can configure clustering Management management and view its status MAC Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses and types of devices attached to what ports and VLAN IDs ARP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses IP address resolution table Configure This link takes you to a screen where you can copy attributes of one port Clone to other ports MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 5 The Web Configurator 5 3 1 Change Your Password After you log in for the first time it is recommended you change the default administrator password Click Management gt Access Control gt Logins to d
325. sage to computer A As a result all the communication between computer A and computer B passes through computer X Computer X can read and alter the information passed between them 26 1 2 1 ARP Inspection and MAC Address Filters When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet You can configure how long the MAC address filter remains in the Switch These MAC address filters are different than regular MAC address filters Chapter 12 on page 123 They are stored only in volatile memory They do not use the same space in memory that regular MAC address filters use MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard They appear only in the ARP Inspection screens and commands not in the MAC Address Filter screens and commands 26 1 2 2 Trusted vs Untrusted Ports Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for ARP inspection This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for DHCP snooping You can also specify the maximum rate at which the Switch receives ARP packets on untrusted ports The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations The sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings The
326. screen to view detailed port settings and status of the VLAN group See Section 9 1 on page 95 for more information on static VLAN Click on an index number in the VLAN Status screen to display VLAN details Figure 50 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail Numen VLAN Status Port Number VID 2 4 6 8 10 12 Elapsed Time Status 1 3 5 7 9 11 U U U U U U 1 1 56 04 Static U U U U Uu The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Status Click this to go to the VLAN Status screen VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Port Number This column displays the ports that are participating in a VLAN A tagged port is marked as T an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry or other added in another way such as via Multicast VLAN Registration MVR 9 5 3 Configure a Static VLAN Use this screen to configure and view 802 1Q VLAN parameters for the Switch See Section 9 1 on page 95 for more information on static VLAN To configure a MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guid
327. sh customer B at edge device 1 and then stripping those tags at edge device 2 as the data frames leave the network Figure 101 VLAN Stacking Example A A VLAN 24 VLAN 24 23 2 VLAN Stacking Port Roles Each port can have three VLAN stacking roles Normal Access Port and Tunnel the latter is for Gigabit ports only Select Normal for regular non VLAN stacking IEEE 802 1Q frame switching Select Access Port for ingress ports on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure The incoming frame is treated as untagged so a second VLAN tag outer VLAN tag can be added Note Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be disabled on a port where you choose Normal or Access Port Select Tunnel Port available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network All VLANs belonging to a customer can be aggregated into a single service provider s VLAN using the outer VLAN tag defined by SP VID Note Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be enabled on a port where you choose Tunnel Port MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking 23 3 VLAN Tag Format A VLAN tag service provider VLAN stacking or customer IEEE 802 1Q consists of the following three fields Table 53 VLAN Tag Format TPID Priority VID TPID Tag Protocol Identifier is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates that whether the frame ca
328. shows you how to configure static routes Static Routing Overview The Switch uses IP for communication with management computers for example using HTTP telnet SSH or SNMP Use IP static routes to have the Switch respond to remote management stations that are not reachable through the default gateway The Switch can also use static routes to send data to a server or device that is not reachable through the default gateway for example when sending SNMP traps or using ping to test IP connectivity This figure shows a Telnet session coming in from network N1 The Switch sends reply traffic to default gateway R1 which routes it back to the manager s computer The Switch needs a static route to tell it to use router R2 to send traffic to an SNMP trap server on network N2 Figure 147 Static Routing Overview E MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 275 Chapter 30 Static Route 30 2 Configuring Static Routing Click IP Application gt Static Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 148 IP Application gt Static Routing EST NEN Active 1 Name E Destination IP Address booo IP Subnet Mask nono Gateway IP Address nono Metric NEN Index Active 1 Yes Name Example Add Cancel Clear Gateway Address Metric Delete 192 168 1 2 F O Destination Address Subnet Mask 172 21 1 1 255 255 0 0 Delete Cancel The following table describes the
329. spection YLAN Status prisoner Feria cei aac dgedodp aigu Eh od 252 20 6 2 ARP Mepection LOO EIUS israr annoa aae aE ON aab baba a ad ads 253 20 7 dialce cisrR amp r er ei eee S 254 26 7 1 ARP specion Port COslqifi 2 5 aa naa N R 256 26 7 2 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure ac snssezssscttnpuacesssnatiiaacansesxdansesocaesteroansassehemeiccoineens 258 Chapter 27 Lopp Guar 261 crim Loop CAR aN TN 261 BO Lud OU eI auciue aude encanta T E E EN cuui RH Sb Lua 263 Chapter 28 VLAN ee T 265 28 1 VLAN Mapping DVOlIM iirrainn pe sede Sie ocu Headend Seatac Prae IER E Ics 265 25 1 1 YLAN Mapping Example iis ioo rae oae DRE Lda EE STER BUEER Eu eR E aaie a aai 265 zoo labi VIRI IRENE acdcetsevudetesodmestr ea eate qo pauted uoto aca e trp mad itte di ut apa OU uus 266 BR murine VLAN Mapping sasini i antici ub E a Flag aaa ebd unb aad ta da Re 267 Chapter 29 Laver durs lI MRRRL 269 29 1 Layer Z Protocol Tunneling CVC AOE Luicincassts ermita bett aet obe iXoa e UgeS eni asta sepa 269 29 1 1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling ModE uccccecccuee teet tm tpe tette Eres ccn R petes cR perc E perc 270 29 2 090n gunmng Layer 2 Protocol TMU NIG iussa Doduackecc niv irme aa cada 271 Part IV IP AppliCallotiun asia irai kii pu Fe Po ex aaaea 273 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 30 cocido eee rE ree nee Oe ee We nop eee Cee eR Wore ere 275 30 1 State PRN CSI Maecen IC I cr MT EN
330. ssover 36 MGMT port 38 MIB and SNMP 306 supported MIBs 307 MIB Management Information Base 306 mirroring ports 153 monitor port 153 154 mounting brackets 31 MRSTP status 139 MST ID 130 MST Instance See MSTI 130 MST region 129 MSTI 130 MSTP 125 128 bridge ID 145 configuration 141 configuration digest 145 forwarding delay 142 Hello Time 145 hello time 142 Max Age 145 max age 142 max hops 142 path cost 143 port priority 143 revision level 142 status 144 MTU Multi Tenant Unit 84 multicast 205 378 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Index 802 1 priority 207 and IGMP 205 IGMP throttling 209 IP addresses 205 overview 205 setup 207 multicast group 212 multicast VLAN 217 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 127 Multiple RSTP 127 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol See MSTP 125 128 Multiple STP 128 MVR 213 configuration 215 group configuration 217 network example 213 MVR Multicast VLAN Registration 213 N network applications 23 network management system NMS 306 NTP RFC 1305 83 P PAGP 272 password 62 administrator 319 Peak Information Rate PIR 147 PHB Per Hop Behavior 280 ping test connection 330 PIR Peak Information Rate 147 policy 187 190 and classifier 187 and DiffServ 185 configuration 187 example 191 overview 185 rules 185 186 viewing 189 policy configuration 190 Port Aggregation Protocol see PAgP port authentication 165 and RADIUS 222 223 IEEE802 1x 168
331. st VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications Such as Media on Demand MoD that use multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring based service provider network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network While isolated in different subscriber VLANs connected devices can subscribe to and unsubscribe from the multicast stream in the multicast VLAN This improves bandwidth utilization with reduced multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management MVR only responds to IGMP join and leave control messages from multicast groups that are configured under MVR Join and leave reports from other multicast groups are managed by IGMP snooping The following figure shows a network example The subscriber VLAN 1 2 and 3 information is hidden from the streaming media server S In addition the multicast VLAN information is only visible to the Switch and S Figure 109 MVR Network Example MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 213 Chapter 24 Multicast 24 6 1 Types of MVR Ports 24 6 2 24 6 3 In MVR a source port is a port on the Switch that can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN while a receiver port can only receive multicast traffic Once configured the Switch maintains a forwarding table that matches the multicast stream to the associated multicast group MVR Modes You can set your Switch to operate in either
332. t Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING User Defined 1 Packet I Nternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Appendix A Common Services Table 128 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP_TUNNEL User Defined 47 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling GRE Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SNMP TCP
333. t again and again causing a broadcast storm If a switch not in loop state connects to a switch in loop state then it will be affected by the switch in loop state in the following way t will receive broadcast messages sent out from the switch in loop state MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 27 Loop Guard t will receive its own broadcast messages that it sends out as they loop back It will then re broadcast those messages again The following figure shows port N on switch A connected to switch B Switch B is in loop state When broadcast or multicast packets leave port N and reach switch B they are sent back to port N on A as they are rebroadcast from B Figure 137 Switch in Loop State The loop guard feature checks to see if a loop guard enabled port is connected to a switch in loop state This is accomplished by periodically sending a probe packet and seeing if the packet returns on the same port If this is the case the Switch will shut down the port connected to the switch in loop state The following figure shows a loop guard enabled port N on switch A sending a probe packet P to switch B Since switch B is in loop state the probe packet P returns to port N on A The Switch then shuts down port N to ensure that the rest of the network is not affected by the switch in loop state Figure 138 Loop Guard Probe Packet ONE w The Switch also shuts down port N if the probe packet returns to sw
334. te Three Color Marker Traffic Policing Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the basis of user defined criteria Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user defined criteria and identify it as either conforming exceeding or violating the criteria MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 31 Differentiated Services Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM defined in RFC 2698 is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to two user defined rates the Committed Information Rate CIR and the Peak Information Rate PIR The CIR specifies the average rate at which packets are admitted to the network The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR CIR and PIR values are based on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider and client Two Rate Three Color Marker evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels High packet loss priority level is referred to as red medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green After TRTCM is configured and DiffServ is enabled the following actions are performed on the colored packets Red high loss priority level packets are dropped Yellow medium loss priority level packets are dropped if there is congestion on the network Green low loss priority level packets are forwa
335. ted Ports Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for DHCP snooping This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for ARP inspection You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port trusted or untrusted can receive each second Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches The Switch discards DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high The Switch learns dynamic bindings from trusted ports Note If DHCP is enabled and there are no trusted ports DHCP requests will not succeed Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers The Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted ports in the following situations The packet is a DHCP server packet for example OFFER ACK or NACK The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the current bindings The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet and the source MAC address and source port do not match any of the current bindings The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high 26 1 1 2 DHCP Snooping Database The Switch stores the binding table in volatile memory If the Switch restarts it loads static bindings from permanent memory but loses the dynamic bindings in which case the devices in the network have to send DHCP requests again As a result it is recommended you configure the DHCP snooping database The DHCP snooping datab
336. tem Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes This name consists of up to 64 printable characters spaces are allowed Person s Name Location Enter the geographic location of your Switch You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed Contact Enter the name of the person in charge of this Switch You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 9 Basic Setting gt General Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Use Time Enter the time service protocol that your timeserver uses Not all time Server when servers support all protocols so you may have to use trial and error to Bootup find a protocol that works The main differences between them are the time format When you select the Daytime RFC 867 format the Switch displays the day month year and time with no time zone adjustment When you use this format it is recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 None is the default value Enter the time manually Each time you turn on the Switch the time and date will be reset to 1970 1 1 0 0 Time Server IP Address Enter the IP address of your timeserver The Switch searches for the
337. the Switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode When the Switch s auto negotiation is turned off an Ethernet port uses the pre configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer Ethernet port are the same in order to connect MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 35 Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 1 2 1 3 1 2 2 Default Ethernet Negotiation Settings The factory default negotiation settings for the Gigabit ports on the Switch are Speed Auto Duplex Auto Flow control Off Link Aggregation Disabled Auto crossover All ports are auto crossover that is auto MDIX ports Media Dependent Interface Crossover so you may use either a straight through Ethernet cable or crossover Ethernet cable for all Gigabit port connections Auto crossover ports automatically sense whether they need to function as crossover or straight ports so crossover cables can connect both computers and switches hubs 3 1 3 Mini GBIC Slots These are slots for mini GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter transceivers A transceiver is a single unit that houses a transmitter and a receiver The Switch does not come with transceivers You must use transceivers that comply with the Small Form factor Pluggable SFP Transceiver MultiSource Agreement MSA See the SFF committee s INF 8074i specification Rev 1 0 for details
338. the receiving port memory buffers fill Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a collision signal to the sending port mimicking a state of packet collision causing the sending port to temporarily stop sending signals and resend later Select Flow Control to enable it 802 1p Priority This priority value is added to incoming frames without a 802 1p priority queue tag See Priority Queue Assignment in Table 10 on page 85 for more information BPDU Control Configure the way to treat BPDUs received on this port You must activate bridging control protocol transparency in the Switch Setup screen first Select Peer to process any BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units received on this port Select Tunnel to forward BPDUs received on this port Select Discard to drop any BPDU received on this port Select Network to process a BPDU with no VLAN tag and forward a tagged BPDU Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide PART Ill Advanced VLAN 95 Loop Guard 261 Static MAC Forward Setup 115 VLAN Mapping 265 Static Multicast Forward Setup 119
339. then the I GMP Snooping VLAN link to display the screen as shown See Section 24 1 4 on page 206 for more information on IGMP Snooping VLAN Figure 107 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN a V p Multicast Setting Mode auto C fixed Apply Cancel VLAN Name VID Add Cancel Clear index Name VID Delete Delete Cancel MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode Select auto to have the Switch learn multicast group membership information of any VLANs automatically Select fixed to have the Switch only learn multicast group membership information of the VLAN s that you specify below In either auto or fixed mode the Switch can learn up to 16 VLANs including up to three VLANs you configured in the MVR screen For example if you have configured one multicast VLAN in the MVR screen you can only specify up to 15 VLANs in this screen The Switch drops any IGMP control messages which do not belong to these 16 VLANs Note You must also enable IGMP snooping in the Multicast Setting screen first Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off o
340. ther you want to implement authentication and or encryption Level for SNMP communication from this user Choose noauth to use the username as the password string to send to the SNMP manager This is equivalent to the Get Set and Trap Community in SNMP v2c This is the lowest security level auth to implement an authentication algorithm for SNMP messages sent by this user priv to implement authentication and encryption for SNMP messages sent by this user This is the highest security level Note The settings on the SNMP manager must be set at the same security level or higher than the security level settings on the Switch Authenticati Select an authentication algorithm MD5 Message Digest 5 and SHA on Secure Hash Algorithm are hash algorithms used to authenticate SNMP data SHA authentication is generally considered stronger than MD5 but is slower Privacy Specify the encryption method for SNMP communication from this user You can choose one of the following e DES Data Encryption Standard is a widely used but breakable method of data encryption It applies a 56 bit key to each 64 bit block of data AES Advanced Encryption Standard is another method for data encryption that also uses a secret key AES applies a 128 bit key to 128 bit blocks of data Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the
341. tion file 6 Forget the password and or IP address 7 Prevent all services from accessing the Switch 8 Change a service port number but forget it Note Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the Switch If you do lock yourself out try using out of band management via the management port to configure the Switch 5 6 Resetting the Switch If you lock yourself and others from the Switch or forget the administrator password you will need to reload the factory default configuration file or reset the Switch back to the factory defaults 5 6 1 Reload the Configuration File Uploading the factory default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600bps with 8 data bit no parity one stop bit and flow control set to none The password will also be reset to 1234 and the IP address to 192 168 1 1 To upload the configuration file do the following 1 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software 2 Disconnect and reconnect the Switch s power to begin a session When you reconnect the Switch s power you will see the initial screen 3 When you see the message Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds press any key to enter debug mode 4 Type atic after the Enter Debug Mode message
342. tion level protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data authentication one party can identify the other party and data integrity you know if data has been changed It relies upon certificates public keys and private keys HTTPS on the Switch is used so that you may securely access the Switch using the web configurator The SSL protocol specifies that the SSL server the Switch must always authenticate itself to the SSL client the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the Switch whereas the SSL client only should authenticate itself when the SSL server requires it to do so Authenticating client certificates is optional and if selected means the SSL client must send the Switch a certificate You must apply for a certificate for the browser from a CA that is a trusted CA on the Switch Please refer to the following figure MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 34 Access Control 1 HTTPS connection requests from an SSL aware web browser go to port 443 by default on the Switch s WS web server 2 HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 by default on the Switch s WS web server Figure 176 HTTPS Implementation WS HTTPS HTTP Note If you disable HTTP in the Service Access Control screen then the Switch blocks all HTTP connection attempts 34 8 HTTPS Example If you haven t changed the de
343. tional network traffic allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your Switch IGMP Snooping and VLANs The Switch can perform IGMP snooping on up to 16 VLANs You can configure the Switch to automatically learn multicast group membership of any VLANs The Switch then performs IGMP snooping on the first 16 VLANs that send IGMP packets This is referred to as auto mode Alternatively you can specify the VLANs that IGMP snooping should be performed on This is referred to as fixed mode In fixed mode the Switch does not learn multicast group membership of any VLANs other than those explicitly added as an IGMP snooping VLAN 24 2 Multicast Status Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast to display the screen as shown This screen shows the multicast group information See Section 24 1 on page 205 for more information on multicasting Figure 105 Advanced Application gt Multicast Multicast Status Multicast Setting Index VID Port Multicast Group The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 Advanced Application gt Multicast Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the index number of the entry VID This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Port This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group Multicast Group This field displays IP multicast group addresses MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast
344. tive Select this option to enable loop guard on the Switch The Switch generates syslog internal log messages as well as SNMP traps when it shuts down a port via the loop guard feature Port This field displays the port number m Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the loop guard feature on this port The Switch sends probe packets from this port to check if the switch it is connected to is in loop state If the switch that this port is connected is in loop state the Switch will shut down this port Clear this check box to disable the loop guard feature Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide VLAN Mapping This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN mapping on the Switch 28 1 VLAN Mapping Overview With VLAN mapping enabled the Switch can map the VLAN ID and priority level of packets received from a private network to those used in the service provider s network
345. tive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Port Type a port to be included in this rule VID Enter a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 This is the VLAN tag carried in the packets and will be translated into the VID you specified in the Translated VI D field Translated VID Enter a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 into which the customer VID carried in the packets will be translated Priority Add Select a priority level from O0 to 7 This is the priority level that replaces the customer priority level in the tagged packets or adds to the untagged packets Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Index This is the number of the VLAN mapping entry in the table MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 267 Chapter 28 VLAN Mapping Table 88 VLAN Mapping Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This shows whether this entry is activated or not Name This is the descriptive name for this rule Port This is the port number to which this rule is applied VID This is the customer VLAN ID in the incoming packets Translat
346. to establish trunk groups LACP also allows port redundancy that is if an operational port fails then one of the standby ports become operational without user intervention Please note that You must connect all ports point to point to the same Ethernet switch and configure the ports for LACP trunking LACP only works on full duplex links All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type speed duplex mode and flow control settings Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Ethernet switch to avoid causing network topology loops Link Aggregation ID LACP aggregation ID consists of the following information Table 36 Link Aggregation ID Local Switch SYSTEM PORT PORT PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PRIORITY NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 Table 37 Link Aggregation ID Peer Switch SYSTEM PORT E MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT TY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 1 Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggregator ID for the trunk group not the individual port MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 17 3 Link Aggregation Status Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation in the navigation panel The Link Aggregation Status screen displays by default See Section 17 1 on page 155 for more information Figure 82 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status T2 7 T3 T4 T5
347. to the Switch s console Use the command show dhcp snooping binding to see the DHCP snooping binding table as shown next sysname show dhcp snooping binding MacAddress IpAddress Lease Type VLAN Port 00 202 00 00 00 1c 10 10 1 16 6d23h59m20s dhcp snooping 100 7 Total number of bindings 1 4 2 How to Use DHCP Relay on the Switch This tutorial describes how to configure your Switch to forward DHCP client requests to a specific DHCP server The DHCP server can then assign a specific IP address based on the information in the DHCP requests 4 2 1 DHCP Relay Tutorial Introduction In this example you have configured your DHCP server 192 168 2 3 and want to have it assign a specific IP address say 172 16 1 18 to DHCP client A based on MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials the system name VLAN ID and port number in the DHCP request Client A connects to the Switch s port 2 in VLAN 102 Figure 26 Tutorial DHCP Relay Scenario b DHCP Server 192 168 2 3 VLAN 102 172 16 1 18 4 2 2 Creating a VLAN Follow the steps below to configure port 2 as a member of VLAN 102 1 Access the web configurator through the Switch s management port MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials 2 Go to Basic Setting gt Switch Setup and set the VLAN type to 802 1Q Click Apply to save the settings to the run time memory Figure 27 Tutorial Set VLAN Type to 802 1Q
348. to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Loop Guard This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to guard against loops on the edge of your network 27 1 Loop Guard Overview Loop guard allows you to configure the Switch to shut down a port if it detects that packets sent out on that port loop back to the Switch While you can use Spanning Tree Protocol STP to prevent loops in the core of your network STP cannot prevent loops that occur on the edge of your network Figure 136 Loop Guard vs STP Li r Lj Li r r 1 Loop Guard u mmommmmmmmmmmmmmmmmemnmmnmmo 2 a Loop guard is designed to handle loop problems on the edge of your network This can occur when a port is connected to a Switch that is in a loop state Loop state occurs as a result of human error It happens when two ports on a switch are connected with the same cable When a switch in loop state sends out broadcast messages the messages loop back to the switch and are re broadcas
349. to view an online help description of that screen MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 5 The Web Configurator MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Initial Setup Example This chapter shows how to set up the Switch for an example network 6 1 Overview The following lists the configuration steps for the initial setup Create a VLAN Set port VLAN ID Configure the Switch IP management address 6 1 1 Creating a VLAN VLANs confine broadcast frames to the VLAN group in which the port s belongs You can do this with port based VLAN or tagged static VLAN with fixed port members In this example you want to configure port 1 as a member of VLAN 2 Figure 37 Initial Setup Network Example VLAN Internet m e CAJ eee eee eee ewes rrr MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 6 Initial Setup Example 1 Click Advanced Application gt VLAN in the navigation panel and click the Static VLAN link OX EET VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN VLAN Search by VID Search The Number of VLAN 1 Index VID Elapsed Time Status 1 Static Change Pages Previous Next 2 In the Static VLAN screen select ACTI VE enter a descriptive name in the Name field and enter 2 in the VLAN Group ID field for the VLAN2 network ED Static VLAN Port 1 C Normal Fixed C Forbidden I TxTagging 2 3 4 5 5 T 8 9 ACTIVE Name Example VLAN Group ID e Control N
350. tus and performance The Switch supports the following MI Bs SNMP MIB II RFC 1213 RFC 1157 SNMP v1 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs RFC 1155 SMI RFC 2674 SNMPv2 SNMPv2c RFC 1757 RMON e SNMPv2 SNMPv2c or later version compliant with RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB for TCP RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 307 Chapter 34 Access Control 34 3 3 SNMP Traps The Switch sends traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs The following tables outline the SNMP traps by category An OID Object ID that begins with 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 is defined in private MIBs Otherwise it is a standard MIB OID Table 103 SNMP System Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION coldstart coldStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 This trap is sent when the Switch is turned on warmstart warmStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 This trap is sent when the Switch restarts fanspeed FanSpeedEventOn MGS 3712F This trap is sent when the fan 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 2 speed goes above or below the 5 2 1 normal operating range MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 2 5 2 1 FanSpeedEventClear MGS 3712F This trap is sent when the fan 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 2 speed returns to the normal 5 2 2 operating range MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 2 5 2 2 temperature TemperatureEventOn MGS 3712F This trap is sent when the 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 2
351. tware configured to the following parameters VT100 Terminal emulation 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit No flow control Connect the male 9 pin end of the console cable to the console port of the Switch Connect the female end to a serial port COM1 COM2 or other COM port of your computer 3 1 2 Gigabit Ethernet Ports The Switch has 1000Base T auto negotiating auto crossover Ethernet ports In 10 100 1000 Mbps Fast Ethernet the speed can be 10 Mbps 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps and the duplex mode can be half duplex or full duplex An auto negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed 10 100 1000 Mbps and duplex mode full duplex or half duplex of the connected device An auto crossover auto MDI MDI X port automatically works with a straight through or crossover Ethernet cable Four of the 1000Base T Ethernet ports are paired with a mini GBIC slot to create a dual personality interface The Switch uses up to one connection for each mini GBIC and 1000Base T Ethernet pair The mini GBIC slots have priority over the Gigabit ports This means that if a mini GBIC slot and the corresponding GbE port are connected at the same time the GbE port will be disabled When auto negotiation is turned on a Ethernet port negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode If the peer Ethernet port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature
352. twork segment and 224 0 0 9 is used to send RIP routing information to all RIP v2 routers on the same network segment A multicast router will not forward a packet with the destination IP address within this range to other networks See the IANA web site for more information The layer 2 multicast MAC addresses used by Cisco layer 2 protocols 01 00 0C CC CC CC and 01 00 0C CC CC CD are also included in this group Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives a frame with a reserved multicast address Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Immed Leave Select this option to set the Switch to remove this port from the multicast tree when an IGMP version 2 leave message is received on this port Select this option if there is only one host connected to this port Normal Leave Enter an IGMP normal leave timeout value from 200 to 6 348 800 in miliseconds Select this option to have the Switch use this timeout to update the forwarding table for the port This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report befo
353. u want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate STP on this port Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 24 on page 126 for more information MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 29 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Tree Select which STP tree configuration this port should participate in Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh
354. uing Method Overview Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion Use the Queuing Method screen to configure queuing algorithms for outgoing traffic See also Priority Queue Assignment in Switch Setup and 802 1p Priority in Port Setup for related information Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth 22 1 1 Strictly Priority Queuing Strictly Priority Queuing SPQ services queues based on priority only As traffic comes into the Switch traffic on the highest priority queue Q7 is transmitted first When that queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue Q6 is transmitted until Q6 empties and then traffic is transmitted on Q5 and so on If higher priority queues never empty then traffic on lower priority queues never gets sent SP does not automatically adapt to changing network requirements 22 1 2 Weighted Fair Queuing Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue s minimum bandwidth based on its bandwidth weight portion the number you configure in the Weight field when there is traffic congestion WFQ is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the
355. ulticast MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for a static multicast MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address This field displays the multicast MAC address that identifies a multicast group VID This field displays the ID number of a VLAN group to which frames containing the specified multicast MAC address will be forwarded Port This field displays the port s within a identified VLAN group to which frames containing the specified multicast MAC address will be forwarded Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Filtering This chapter discusses MAC address port filtering 12 1 Configure a Filtering Rule Filtering means sifting traffic going through the Switch based on the source and or destination MAC addresses and VLAN group ID Click Advanced Application gt Filtering in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 65 Advanced Application gt Filtering Filtering g Active Li Name Discard source Discard destination MAC Ek EE EE E h a VID Action Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Action Delete Delete Cancel MGS 3712 MGS 3712
356. ur on a port the port must be active Aging Time Enter a time from 10 to 3000 seconds This is how long all dynamically learned MAC addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out and must be relearned GARP Timer Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 10 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Join Timer Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a Join Period timer The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and 65535 milliseconds the default is 200 milliseconds See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information Leave Timer Leave Time sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave Period timer Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer the default is 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave All Period timer Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer Priority Queue Assignment
357. uration 41 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDs The Switch does not turn on None of the LEDs turn on 1 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the Switch 2 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the Switch and plugged in to an appropriate power source Make sure the power source is turned on 3 Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch 4 Ifthe problem continues contact the vendor The ALM LED is on 1 Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor to the Switch 2 Ifthe problem continues contact the vendor One of the LEDs does not behave as expected MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 353 Chapter 41 Troubleshooting 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED See Section 3 3 on page 43 2 Check the hardware connections See the Quick Start Guide and Section 41 1 on page 353 3 Inspect your cables for damage Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables 4 Disconnect and re connect the power cord to the Switch 5 Ifthe problem continues contact the vendor 41 2 Switch Access and Login forgot the IP address for the Switch 1 The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 2 Use the console port to log in to the Switch 3 Use the MGMT port to log in to the Switch the default IP address of the MGMT port is 192 168 0 1 4 Ifthis does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults S
358. ure 77 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP ree Protoco Status Active 1 Hello Time b seconds MAX Age bo seconds Forwarding Delay fis seconds Maximum hops ha Configuration Name niscbnnna XCS SS Revision Number b Apply Cancel Instance Instance Bridge Priority 32768 VLAN Range Start End Add Remove Clear Enabled VLAN s Port Active Priority Path Cost z sd mee 1 E 128 a 2 D 128 j 3 r1 128 4 4 GB 128 a 5 1 128 n Add Cancel Instance VLAN Active Port Delete 0 1 4094 Delete Cancel MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MSTP Status screen see Figure 78 on page 144 Active Select this check box to activate MSTP on the Switch Clear this checkbox to disable MSTP on the Switch Note You must also activate Multiple Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable MSTP on the Switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds MaxAge This is the maximum time in secon
359. urned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Instance Use this section to configure MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance settings Instance Enter the number you want to use to identify this MST instance on the Switch The Switch supports instance numbers 0 16 MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 31 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Priority Set the priority of the Switch for the specific spanning tree instance The lower the number the more likely the Switch will be chosen as the root bridge within the spanning tree instance Enter priority values between 0 and 61440 in increments of 4096 thus valid values are 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 and 61440 VLAN Range Enter the start of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the Start field Enter the end of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the End field Next click Add to add this range of VLAN s to be mapped to the MST instance Remove to remove this range of VLAN s from being mapped to the MST instanc
360. ut that should not affect other applications and users Level 0 Typically used for best effort traffic Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 8 6 IP Setup Use the IP Setup screen to configure the Switch IP address default gateway device the default domain name server and the management VLAN ID The default gateway specifies the IP address of the default gateway next hop for outgoing traffic 8 6 1 Management IP Addresses The Switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network The factory default IP address is 192 168 1 1 The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address The factory default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 You can configure up to 64 IP addresses which are used to access and manage the Switch from the ports belonging to the pre defined VLAN s MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Note You must configure a VLAN first Figure 45 Basic Setting gt IP Setup AEn NP Domain Name Server Default Management In band Management IP Address Out of band Management IP Address
361. v ntrusted v ntrusted v ntrusted v ntrusted v ntrusted Configure Rate pps Burst interval seconds ud ad Lasst ica ah Gee ee A UE i or emm WARN a MN NEEMNMEMMMNNM raum EENENMEEEMENMN ra RENE im e ise NN romssescsuius Eu d E Tamen MEM ae Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 84 ARP Inspection Port Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number If you configure the port the settings are applied to all of the ports Trusted State Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations The sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high You can specify the maximum rate at which ARP packets can arrive on untrusted ports Limit These settings have no effect on trusted ports Rate pps Specify the maximum rate 1 2048 packets per second at which the Switch receives ARP packets from each port The Switch discards any additional ARP packets Enter 0 to disable this limit MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 257 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 84 ARP Inspection Port Configure continued LAB
362. vendsinnciavcecauearnovee 21 Getma o TDI Your SWE annta a poaait ated ee A Dean 23 Hardware Installation and Connection ccccccsccsececcccececcseseeeeeaseeceeeeeseeeceesseaeaaeceseeseeseeeeses 29 lupo pu dtr Re ad ROADS A Q 45 Basic Condurallol aiaei A eR MA EET POMA aeina N 1L REN KADEA EAA O Rai 55 The Wob COBO secenario 57 ital Setup Example sercis A Ai 67 System Status and Port Statisties uice ku Con ARR ana 73 E a ob beeen ftue ea Qu Eve ubi Pop RES uda prat cue Pur ERR 79 AUVE EA uis pai EHE RE REM ERRINEDIA FE RARE LR PORRO LAN SEXE M QUE DX dE KIM DO terry eer ELA URNA ORDIN HE ipa 93 LUE i ett mme VAAN E S T EAE E Mic e as 95 Siate MAC Forward SEUD m cestleshaed Saneebeige N ccrdeade bacteria Hence aeatceds 115 sane Multicast Parward Sip uius prie sS raa xe dE ER Heb a Eb tr DU Re DIRE AIRE 119 dU TREE a 123 Spanning Troe Prolog eT 125 e aen eE i AEE E E OE T NUT 147 Broadcast olorm DOHIIOl uiuo iio d egeat mis acid a aa 151 QUII ee TEE 153 Ng eie ps e E E D OL EL DOLLS E 195 ibuES TD LAE DOLES I EI 165 POM E TA is BEA EE T T wiles E E E aps tal EE T E 171 Me el SUSI vanea a 177 PDC FUG asc cas 185 Cuenta MEIO E a ST 193 UAN Est a E CTS 197 MUNCA S Loser ona a FER RP PL RR E D an ARE VE eS 205 ET EE E TEE E AE A PA T EA PE E E A A A E A ES AEAT 221 a ao a aa 235
363. ver s Latch Example 3 1 4 Management Port The MGMT management port is used for local management Connect directly to this port using an Ethernet cable You can configure the Switch via Telnet or the web configurator The default IP address of the management port is 192 168 0 1 with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 3 1 5 Power Connector Make sure you are using the correct power source as shown on the panel and that no objects obstruct the airflow of the fans Use the following procedures to connect the Switch to a power source after you have installed it Note Check the power supply requirements in Chapter 42 on page 357 and make sure you are using an appropriate power source Keep the power supply switch and the Switch s power switch in the OFF position until you come to the procedure for turning on the power MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Use only power wires of the required diameter for connecting the Switch to a power supply 3 1 5 1 AC Power Connection Connect the female end of the power cord to the power socket of your Switch Connect the other end of the cord to a power outlet 3 1 5 2 DC Power Connection The Switch uses a single ETB series terminal block plug with four pins which allows you to connect up to two separate power supplies If one power supply fails the system can operate on the remaining power supply Use two wires to connect to a single terminal pa
364. wer is turned off C Click this link to go to the status page of the Switch D Click this link to logout of the web configurator E Click this link to display web help pages The help pages provide descriptions for all of the configuration screens In the navigation panel click a main link to reveal a list of submenu links Table 4 Navigation Panel Sub links Overview ADVANCED APPLICATION Basic Setting BASIC SETTING IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT Basic Setting Advanced Application IP Application Management System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup Port Setup Advanced Application IP Application Management VLAN Static MAC Forwarding Static Multicast Forwarding Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Bandwidth Control Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Link Aggregation Port Authentication Port Security Classifier Policy Rule Queuing Method VLAN Stacking Multicast AAA IP Source Guard Loop Guard VLAN Mapping Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling v IP Application Management Static Routing DiffServ DHCP Management Maintenance Access Control Diagnostic Syslog Cluster Management MAC Table ARP Table Configure Clone The following table describes the links in the navigation panel Table 5 Navigation Panel Links LINK Basic Settings DESCRIPTION MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 5 The We
365. when the Ethernet link is up Link DownEventClear MGS 3712F This trap is sent when the 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 25 Ethernet link is up 2 2 MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 25 2 2 linkdown linkDown 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down LinkDownEventOn MGS 3712F 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 25 2 1 MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 25 2 1 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 34 Access Control Table 104 SNMP InterfaceTraps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION autonegotiati on AutonegotiationFailedEve ntOn MGS 3712F 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 25 2 1 MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 25 2 1 This trap is sent when an Ethernet interface fails to auto negotiate with the peer Ethernet interface AutonegotiationFailedEve ntClear MGS 3712F 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 48 25 2 2 MGS 3712 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 47 25 2 2 This trap is sent when an Ethernet interface auto negotiates with the peer Ethernet interface IIdp transceiver ddmi LLDPRemoteTopologyCha nge transceiverddmiEventOn 1 0 8802 1 1 2 0 0 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 45 27 2 1 This trap is sent when the LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol remote topology changes This trap is sent when one of the device operating parameters such as transceiver temperature lase
366. witch is loading dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database write The Switch is updating the DHCP snooping database Delay timer expiry This field displays how much longer in seconds the Switch tries to complete the current update before it gives up It displays Not Running if the Switch is not updating the DHCP snooping database right now Abort timer expiry This field displays when in seconds the Switch is going to update the DHCP snooping database again It displays Not Running if the current bindings have not changed since the last update This section displays information about the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database Last succeeded time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database successfully Last failed time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database unsuccessfully Last failed reason This field displays the reason the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database unsuccessfully This section displays historical information about the number of times the Switch successfully or unsuccessfully read or updated the DHCP snooping database Total attempts This field displays the number of times the Switch has tried to access the DHCP snooping database for any reason Startup failures This field displays the number of times the Switch could not create or read the DHCP snooping d
367. work A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group not individual receiving devices IP addresses in the Class D range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes see the IANA web site for more information IGMP Filtering With the IGMP filtering feature you can control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services such as content information distribution based on service plans and types of subscription You can set the Switch to filter the multicast group join reports on a per port basis by configuring an IGMP filtering profile and associating the profile to a port MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast 24 1 3 24 1 4 IGMP Snooping A Switch can passively snoop on IGMP packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership It checks IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures multicasting accordingly IGMP snooping allows the Switch to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them The Switch forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it has learned from IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured to ports that are members of that group IGMP snooping generates no addi
368. y 1 rH 32768 v p seconds po seconds 5 2 C 22768 b seconds po seconds 5 Port Active Priority Path Cost Tree mm Hes i r m M i 2 m h M m 3 m 2 NEN DE fie s E 5 r 2 M zl 8 m 128 ko O zl iiu Anu Ogg OS Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MRSTP Status screen see Figure 74 on page 135 Tree This is a read only index number of the STP trees Active Select this check box to activate an STP tree Clear this checkbox to disable an STP tree Note You must also activate Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable MRSTP on the Switch MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 137 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 29 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the h
369. y mode Initial Remote Specify the default remote directory path Directory Initial Local Specify the default local directory path Directory 33 8 4 FTP Restrictions FTP will not work when FTP service is disabled in the Service Access Control screen The IP address es in the Remote Management screen does not match the client IP address If it does not match the Switch will disconnect the FTP session immediately MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Chapter 33 Maintenance MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide Access Control This chapter describes how to control access to the Switch 34 1 Access Control Overview A console port and FTP are allowed one session each Telnet and SSH share nine sessions up to five Web sessions five different user names and passwords and or limitless SNMP access control sessions are allowed Table 101 Access Control Overview Console Port SSH Telnet FTP Web SNMP One session Share up to nine One session Up to five No limit sessions accounts A console port access control session and Telnet access control session cannot coexist when multi login is disabled See the CLI Reference Guide for more information on disabling multi login 34 2 The Access Control Main Screen Click Management gt Access Control in the navigation panel to display the main screen as shown Figure 169 Management gt Access Control INERTA SNMP
370. y a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 25 2 2 TACACS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your TACACS server settings See Section 25 1 2 on page 222 for more information on TACACS servers Click on the TACACS Server Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown Figure 120 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup ACACS Server Setup AAA Authentication Server Mode index priority Timeout o seconds Index IP Address TCP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 49 O 2 0 0 0 0 4o ri Apply Cancel Accounting Server Timeout o seconds Index IP Address TCP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 ag O 2 0 0 0 0 49 E Apply Cancel MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide
371. y how many multicast packets the port receives per second DLF pkt s Select this option and specify how many destination lookup failure DLF packets the port receives per second Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide m m Mirroring This chapter discusses port mirroring setup screens 16 1 Port Mirroring Setup Port mirroring allows you to copy a traffic flow to a monitor port the port you copy the traffic to in order that you can examine the traffic from the monitor port without interference Click Advanced Application Mirroring in the navigation panel to display the Mirroring screen Use this screen to select a monitor port and specify the traffic flow to be copied to the monitor port Figure 81 Advanced Application gt Mirroring Ru nur Active O Monitor Port fi Port Mirrored Direction i Ei Ingress ngress v ngress v Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress TR ngress Y Ingress Ingress Ingress anha Ha HeH Ho HaHa pHa ka Hm Ingress Apply Cancel MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide 153 Chapter 16 Mirrorin
372. zo sz o Bx sr afez sofp sfe soley sez sex s5 6 si se sz sz ez eps er Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 94 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION 0 63 This is the DSCP classification identification number To set the IEEE 802 1p priority mapping select the priority level from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MGS 3712 MGS 3712F User s Guide DHCP This chapter shows you how to configure the DHCP feature 32 1 DHCP Overview 32 1 1 32 1 2 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the Switch as a DHCP server or a DHCP relay agent When configured as a server the Switch provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If you configure the Switch as a relay agent then the Switch forwards DHCP requests to DHCP server on your network If you don t configure the Switch as a DHCP server or relay agent then you must have a DHCP server in the broadcast

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  TAFCO WINDOWS NU2-125S-I Installation Guide  UMR ADEF Yves Chevallard Théorie Anthropologique du  FERTILIFE  Avaya Business Communications Manager 450 5.0 User's Manual  Instrucciones - Klein Tools Mexico  Multi-Function Laptop AC Adaptor & Charger  Panel Interface Module (PIM400-485) User Guide  UPS7100MX-T3シリーズ  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file